ALFOplus User Manual - MN - 00273e - ED6 PDF

ALFOplus
Access Link Full Outdoor
User Manual
MN.00273.E - 006
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
Contents
Section 1.
USER GUIDE 7
1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7
2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 8

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ..................................................................... 8
2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................. 8
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................. 8
2.2 SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................10
2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT) .................................................................................11
3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................12

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................12
3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................12
3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................12
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION 15
4 LIST OF ACRONYMS .................................................................................................15

4.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS ..........................................................................................15
5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................17

5.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................17
5.2 APPLICATIONS .................................................................................................17
5.2.1 Functionality ..........................................................................................18
5.3 PROGRAMMABILITY ..........................................................................................18
5.3.1 Software................................................................................................19
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................22

6.1 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ..............................................................................22
6.2 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................24
6.2.1 Adaptive modulation ...............................................................................38
6.3 LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................42
MN.00273.E - 006 1
6.3.1 Ethernet electrical interface characteristics .................................................42
6.3.2 Ethernet optical interface characteristics ....................................................49
6.4 POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE ...............................................................................49
6.4.1 PoE injector ...........................................................................................50
6.4.1.1 PoE injector functionality ...........................................................50
6.4.1.2 Code table...............................................................................51
6.4.1.3 Electrical characteristics ............................................................52
6.4.1.4 Connectors ..............................................................................52
6.4.1.5 Description of alarms ................................................................52
6.5 WAVEGUIDE FLANGE ........................................................................................53
6.6 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................54
6.7 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................................................54
6.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ..........................................................................54
7 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................55

7.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................55
7.1.1 Block diagram ........................................................................................55
7.1.2 Baseband processor ................................................................................58
7.1.3 TRX Transceiver unit ...............................................................................58
7.1.4 Switch function.......................................................................................58
7.1.5 Synchronisation unit (SETS) .....................................................................60
7.1.6 Adaptive code modulation ........................................................................61
7.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction ........................................................................62
7.2 LOOPS ............................................................................................................64
7.3 LOGICAL PROCESSING FUNCTIONS FOR ETHERNET PAYLOAD ................................64
7.3.1 Rate limiting ..........................................................................................65
7.3.2 Enhanced QoS Management .....................................................................65
7.3.3 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2) ...............................66
7.3.3.1 Not registered traffic default colour.............................................66
7.3.3.2 CIR/EIR configuration ...............................................................66
7.3.4 Enhanced VLAN Management ...................................................................67
7.3.5 Congestion avoidance..............................................................................68
7.3.5.1 Extended buffer capability on the radio queues.............................69
7.3.6 Scheduling methods ................................................................................69
7.4 ETHERNET FRAME FRAGMENTATION ...................................................................70
7.5 PACKET COMPRESSION .....................................................................................71
7.6 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTENANCE) .....................73
7.6.1 Service layer OAM...................................................................................73
7.7 ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON ..................................................75
7.8 RMON COUNTERS .............................................................................................76
7.9 ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRIORITY COUNTERS .......77
7.9.1 Priority RMON.........................................................................................77
7.9.2 Service RMON ........................................................................................78
7.10 SYNCHRONISM.................................................................................................78
7.11 SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM .............................................................................80
7.12 MCM PROTOCOL (MICROWAVE CAPACITY MANAGEMENT) ......................................81
7.13 FADE MARGIN MEASURE....................................................................................85
7.14 PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT .............................................86
7.15 G.8264 SSM – SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE...........................................87
7.15.1 SSM on Ethernet Interfaces ......................................................................88
2 MN.00273.E - 006
Section 3.
INSTALLATION 91
8 INSTALLATION OF ALFOPlus....................................................................................91
8.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION..........................91
8.2 GENERAL.........................................................................................................92
8.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING.........................................................................................92
8.4 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS ................................................................92
8.5 GROUNDING CONNECTION ................................................................................93
8.5.1 Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (universal - no tools).93
8.6 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) .............................................95
8.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................................................................95
8.7.1 Standard coupling kit ..............................................................................95
8.8 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .............95
8.8.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................95
8.8.1.1 1+0 ODU with integrated antenna ..............................................96
8.9 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...............97
8.9.1 ODU (Standard Lock) ..............................................................................97
8.9.1.1 1+0 ODU with separated antenna...............................................97
8.9.1.2 Waveguide towards the antenna.................................................98
8.10 WAVEGUIDE BENDING ......................................................................................98
8.11 ACCESSORIES FOR INSTALLATION ................................................................... 102
8.11.1 Installation procedure of optical box ........................................................ 105
8.11.2 RJ45 crimping tool ................................................................................ 110
8.11.2.1 Use standard RJ45 crimper ...................................................... 110
8.12 USER CONNECTORS........................................................................................ 111
8.12.1 Auxiliary connector ............................................................................... 111
8.12.2 RJ45 connector..................................................................................... 114
8.12.3 Optical connector .................................................................................. 123
8.12.4 Optical SFP mounting procedure ............................................................. 127
8.12.5 Optical SFP unmounting procedure .......................................................... 127
Section 4.
LINE-UP 135
9 LINE-UP OF ALFOPlus ............................................................................................135

9.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 135
9.2 SWITCH ON ................................................................................................... 135
9.3 ALARM LED CHECK ......................................................................................... 136
9.4 CONNECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................... 136
9.5 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 140
9.6 OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT ............................... 145
9.7 ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT.................................................... 148
9.8 COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ........................................ 149
9.8.1 Ethernet connection stability .................................................................. 149
9.9 FIRMWARE UPDATE ........................................................................................ 150
9.9.1 Scope.................................................................................................. 150
9.9.2 Procedure of firmware update................................................................. 151
MN.00273.E - 006 3
9.10 BACKUP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING
THE PARAMETERS........................................................................................... 152
9.10.1 Scope.................................................................................................. 152
9.10.2 Backup/Restore Configuration using SCT.................................................. 153
9.10.3 Backup/Restore Configuration using WEBLCT............................................ 153
Section 5.
MAINTENANCE 155
10 ALARMS ................................................................................................................155
10.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 155
10.2 ALARM SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 155
10.2.1 LED status ........................................................................................... 156
10.2.2 Alarms group ....................................................................................... 156
11 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................................159

11.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 159
11.2 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 159
11.2.1 Periodical checks .................................................................................. 159
11.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) ................................................ 160
11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................... 160
Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION 161
12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................161

12.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 161
12.2 SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET.................................................................. 161
12.2.1 General ............................................................................................... 162
12.2.2 Configurability ...................................................................................... 166
12.2.3 Address ............................................................................................... 166
12.2.4 Restore supervisioning access mode ........................................................ 166
Section 7.
COMPOSITION 167
13 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................167

13.1 GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 167
13.2 ODU PART NUMBER ........................................................................................ 167
4 MN.00273.E - 006
Section 8.
RF CHARACTERISTICS 181
14 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................181
14.1 GENERALS ..................................................................................................... 181
15 ALFOplus 7 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS.......................................................................182

15.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 182
15.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 182
15.2.1 Available frequencies............................................................................. 182
15.2.2 Transmitter characteristics ..................................................................... 194
15.2.3 Receiver characteristics ......................................................................... 195
16 ALFOplus 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................196

16.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 196
16.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 196
17 ALFOPLUS 13 GHz CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................204

17.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 204
17.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 204
18 ALFOPLUS 15 GHz CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................209

18.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 209
18.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 209
19 ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................219

19.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 219
19.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 219

20.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 224
20.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 224

21.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 231
MN.00273.E - 006 5
21.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 231

22.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 240
22.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 240

23.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 244
23.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 244

24.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 248
24.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 248
Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES 253
25 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................253
26 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................257
27 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................261
6 MN.00273.E - 006
Section 1.
USER GUIDE
1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SIAE MICROELETTRONICA
Via Buonarroti, 21 - Cologno (MI) - Italy
DECLARES
THAT THE PRODUCTS
Digital Radio Relay System ALFOplus

comply with the essential requirements of article 3 of the
R&TTE Directive (1999/05/EC)
and therefore are marked:
The following standards have been applied:
EN 60950-1:2006 and EN 60950-22:2006

“Safety of information technology equipment”
EN 301 489-4 v.1.4.1. (2009-5)

“Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); ElectroMag-
netic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4: Specific conditions for fixed
radio links and ancillary equipment and services”
ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 v1.4.1 (2010-7)

“Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for point-to-point equipment and antennas;
Part2-2: Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE Directive for digital sys-
tems operating in frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied.”
The equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.Following the requirements

of the R&TTE Directive (article 12) and the relevant decision of the EC, in term of classifica-
tion of Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and associated iden-
tifiers, the transmitting equipment shall carry the 'class 2' identifier:
Cologno Monzese, 20/06/2012 On behalf of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA

Chairman and Executive Officer
Alberto Mascetti
MN.00273.E - 006 7
2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY
RULES
2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the con-
ductor.
2.1.1 Artificial respiration
It is important to start mouth resuscitation at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth resuscitation method is described in the Tab.1.
2.1.2 Treatment of burns
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
Warning
• Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections
• Apply dry gauze on the burns

• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
8 MN.00273.E - 006
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration
Step Description Figure
Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
1 stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (den-
tures, chewing gum, etc.).
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patient’s head and one under his neck.
Lift the patient’s head and let it recline backwards as far

2 as possible.
Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.
3 While performing these operations take a good supply of oxy-

gen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open
With your thumb between the patient’s chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities
While performing these operations observe if the patient’s

chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patient’s chest
5
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patient’s nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patient’s head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of

twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
6
patient has regained conscious–ness, or until a doctor has as-
certained his death.
MN.00273.E - 006 9
2.2 SAFETY RULES
When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain compo-
nents electrostatic charge sensitive.
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication
In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).
Fig.2 - Elasticized band
Fig.3 - Coiled cord
This device has Class I LASER modules: it is not required to have a laser warning label or other laser state-
ment (IEC 60825-1).
10 MN.00273.E - 006
2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL &
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.4 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.
Fig.4 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419
MN.00273.E - 006 11
3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL
The purpose of this manual consists in providing for the user information which permit to operate and
maintain the ALFOplus radio equipment.
Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/WebLCT management program
windows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help–on line.
3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE
The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:
• a basic understanding of microwave transmission
• installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system
• a good knowledge of IP networks and routing policy.
3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL
The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.
Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.
Section 1 – User Guide
It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.
Section 2 – Description and specifications
It describes a general overview of the typical applications and in particular of the whole radio equipment.
Section 3 – Installation
The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.
The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.
12 MN.00273.E - 006
Section 4 – Line–Up
Line–up procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.
Section 5 – Maintenance
The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the
faulty unit and to re–establish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.
Section 6 – Programming and supervision
The ALFOplus radio is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are al-
ready available, some other will be available in the future. This section lists the tools implemented and
indicates if descriptions are already available.
Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.
Section 7 – Composition
Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.
Section 8 – RF characteristics
ALFOplus technical radio specifications, available for each frequency, are described in this section.
Section 9 – Indexes and services
Lists of figures, list of tables and assistance service are shown in this section.
MN.00273.E - 006 13
14 MN.00273.E - 006
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND
SPECIFICATION
4 LIST OF ACRONYMS
4.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS
What follows is a list of acronyms used in this handbook:
- ACM Adaptive Code Modulation

- AGC Automatic Gain Control
- ATPC Automatic Transmitted Power Control
- BBP Base Band Processor
- BER Bit Error Rate
- CBS Committed Burst Size
- CF Coupling Flag
- CIR Committed Information Rate
- CoS Class of Service
- CVID Customer VLAN Identifier
- DSCP Differentiated Serviced Code Point
- EBS Excess Burst Size
- EIR Excess Information Rate
- ELP Ethernet Line Protection
- EVC Ethernet Virtual Connection
- FPGA Field Programmable Gate-Array
- IP ToS Type of Service IP
- LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol or Link Trunk
- LAN Local Area Network
MN.00273.E - 006 15
- LLF Link Loss Forwarding
- LNA Low Noise Amplifier
- MAC Media Access Control
- MDI Medium Dependent Interface
- MDX Medium Dependent Interface Crossover
- MEF Metro Ethernet Forum
- NE Network Element
- OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance
- ODU Outdoor Unit
- PLL Phase Locked Loop
- POE Power Over Ethernet

- PToS Priority Type of Service
- QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
- RED Random Early Drop

- RF Radio Frequency
- RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
- RX Direction from antenna to user

- SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal
- SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
- SVID Service VLAN Identifier

- TX Direction from user to antenna
- UNI User Network Interface
- VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator

- VID Virtual Lan Identifier
- VLAN Virtual LAN
- WEBLCT WEB Local Craft Terminal

- WRR Weighted Round Robin
16 MN.00273.E - 006
5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION
5.1 GENERAL
ALFOplus is a full-outdoor and full IP digital radio system for point-to-point applications, used for high ca-
pacity Ethernet transport (500 Mbps). The frequency range is from 6 GHz up to 42 GHz with hitless adap-
tive code modulation (from 4QAM up to 1024QAM).
ALFOplus radio equipment can work in two main modes:
• Fixed modulation: in this mode the system works with a fixed modulation and FEC profile, selectable
by software. The modulation and the error code do not change during the time.
• Adaptive modulation: in this mode the system can dynamically change its modulation and FEC be-
tween a minimum and maximum ACM profiles that can be selected by software. The ACM profile is
instantaneously decided by the equipment depending on the propagation conditions.
ALFOplus consists of a lightweight, compact, weather-proof box containing transceiver, modem, baseband
unit, line interface and lightning protection.
There are two available versions for ALFOplus: Gigabit Electrical (GE) and Gigabit Optical (GO). This doc-
ument provides a general overview of ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) radio equipment.
5.2 APPLICATIONS
ALFOplus is the ideal solution in urban environments for all carrier-class applications in which the typical
requirements are Ethernet connections:
• full IP radio, providing the foundation for a leading edge network
• fully integrable with 3G, 4G, LTE nodes and backhaul
• ideal for a fast and flexible evolution towards full IP network
• complementary solutions for fiber deploy
• last mile fiber extension for business customers
• ISP high capacity and performance, for LAN-to-LAN connections
• emergency wireless links
• zero footprint applications
ALFOplus doesn’t need any indoor unit and the power supply can be provided directly by POE through the
data cable or through a dedicated auxiliary port.
Radio link system configuration:
• 1+0 (unprotected, one ODU only)
Following two versions of ALFOplus are available:
• Electrical Gigabit Version
- LAN1 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT traffic and/or supervision port with clock, synchronism recovery
and PoE
MN.00273.E - 006 17
- LAN2 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock and synchronism recov-
ery
• Optical Gigabit Version
- LAN1 - 1x100/1000BaseX traffic and/or supervision port with clock and synchronism recovery
- LAN2 - 1x10/100/1000BaseT supervision and/or traffic port with clock, synchronism recovery
and PoE
Depending on software configuration made for each port LAN1 and LAN2.
5.2.1 Functionality
ALFOplus has a Ethernet switching (L2) unit and a processing unit, both embedded in the equipment, to-
ward the radio channel.
Ethernet ports support the “standard” subset of the functionalities provided by the embedded switch. In
particular, following functionalities are available:
• MAC switching, Learning and Ageing
• Jumbo Frame up to 10 kbytes
• MEF 10.2 bandwidth profiles for Ethernet Services

• IEEE 802.1Q VLAN/IEEE VLAN stacking QinQ and VLAN rewriting
• LLF (Link Loss Forwarding) bidirectional
• IEEE 802.3x Flow control

• Flexible QoS based on VLAN (IEEE 802.1p), MPLS Exp BIT, ToS/DSCP (IPV4 or IPV6) per Port,
802.1p rewrite with MPLS
• Queue Packet with Drop Policy: Tail Drop, Queue Drop, Red, Wred/Strict, WFQ, Mixed
• Ethernet Frame Fragmentation
• Advanced multi-layer 1/2/3/4 header Ethernet compressor algorithm
• IEEE 802.1d STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)

• IEEE 802.1v RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
• IEEE 802.1ag ITU-T y.1731 OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)

1
• IEEE 802.3af PoE - Power over Ethernet
• Complete Synchronisation Management IEEE 1588 v2 precision time protocol and SSM G8264
(quality SyncE)
• Advanced Statistics Monitoring Based VLAN and Priority

• Ethernet performance monitoring - RMon
• MCM (Microwave Capacity Management) Cisco-SIAE
5.3 PROGRAMMABILITY
ALFOplus radio system is managed by a microprocessor that makes it totally programmable via software
to perform the following functions:
• radio link management
1 With dispensation to maximum power
18 MN.00273.E - 006
- bandwidth and modulation
- ACM engine configuration
- Link ID
- Tx frequency and power
- ATPC (Automatic Transmission Power Control)
• main management
- IP port configurable and supervisioning
- routing table
- remote element list
- alarm severity configuration (modify alarm)
- user manager (password, user, SNMP login)

- SNMP V.1/V.2/V.3 compatible
- Security Management (SSH, SFTP)
- Secure HTTP Access (HTTPS)

• operation and maintenance
- permanent Tx Off
- Rx signal threshold alarm

- performance monitoring (G.828, Rx PWR, Tx PWR, ACM) with alarm threshold
- S/N measure
- LAN summary, statistic basis on port, VLAN or Priority

- backup/restore configuration
- software update
- report&logger maintenance (inventory, fault, commands)

- SNTP alignment
• manual operations (depends on timeout)
- Tx transmitter OFF
- force switch synch
- radio BER test
- fade margin measure

- baseband loop
- Ethernet port loop
• Ethernet switch management and functionalities
• synchronisation
5.3.1 Software
Radio equipment is provided with an embedded Web Server and can be locally/remotely controlled by a
HTTP browser running on PC (Internet Explorer or Firefox are recommended): this application is called We-
bLCT.
Optionally, it is also available software with additional features, that allows the file transfer (Backup/Re-
store config. and firmware update):
• WLC (WebLCT Console): it is a free software downloadable from the site www.siaemic.com after
registration
MN.00273.E - 006 19
• SCT (Subnetwork Craft Terminal) that can manage a subnetwork of max 100SIAE network elements
and nodal configuration.
The hardware platform is based on Personal Computer with at least the following characteristics:
• HD with 200Mbyte of free space
• Windows XP/Windows 7 32bit or 64bit
The network management system (NMS5LX/UX) functionalities, SCT/WLC are widely described in the sep-
arated relevant manual.
20 MN.00273.E - 006
254 mm
254 mm
157 mm
1 2 3
1. AUX: auxiliary connector for 48 Vdc power, serial console and pointing alignment
2. 1: LAN1 10/100/1000BaseT (or 100/1000BaseX2 depending on HW version) for data/management

traffic
3. 2: LAN2 10/100/1000BaseT (or 100/1000BaseX2 depending on HW version) for data/management

traffic
Fig.5 - ALFOplus front/side view
2 In case of Optional version the supported SFP modules are always optical because electrical modules
are not mechanically compatible.
MN.00273.E - 006 21
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
For more details, refer to Section 8. RF CHARACTERISTICS.
6.1 INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
The equipment complies with the following international standard:
- EMC EN 301 489-4
- RF channel arrangement see Tab.2
Tab.2 - RF channel arrangement
Frequency band
Duplex Spacing Channel number Subbands
(GHz)
6L ITU-R F.383-8 and CEPT REC 14-01E - 252.04 MHz 3CH @ 29.65MHz 4
6U ITU-R F.384-10 - 340 MHz 3CH @ 40MHz 2
7.1 - 7.4 ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3 - 196 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3
7.1 - 7.4 ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.1 - 7.4 CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.1 - 7.4 168 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.4 - 7.7 ITU-R F.385-9 - 161 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.4 - 7.7 CEPT REC(02)06 - 154 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
7.7 - 8.2 ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 6 - 311.32 MHz 4CH @ 29.65MHz 4
7.9 - 8.5 CEPT ECC REC(02)06 310 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3
8.2 - 8.5 ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 3 - 119/126 MHz 2CH @ 28MHz 3
11 CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - 490/530 MHz 4CH @ 40MHz 3
13 ITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E - 266MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 3
15 ITU-R F636 - 420 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 4
15 ITU-R F636 - 490 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 4
15 ITU-R F636 - 644 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 2
15 CEPT T/R 12-07 - 728 MHz 4CH @ 28MHz 1
22 MN.00273.E - 006
15 CEPT - 315 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 5
15 CEPT - 322 MHz 3CH @ 28MHz 5
17 SRD ERC REC 70-03 (unlicensed) 12CH @ 28 MHz 1
18 ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - 1560 MHz 15CH @ 27.5MHz 1
23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 2
23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - 1200 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 3
23 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex1 - 1232 MHz 11CH @ 28MHz 3
26 ITU-R F.748 - Annex 1 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - 1008 MHz 16CH @ 28MHz 2
32 ITU-R F.1520 and CEPT Rec (01)02 - 812 MHz 10CH @ 28MHz 3
38 ITU-R F.749 and CEPT Rec T/R 12-01 - 1260 MHz 20CH @ 28MHz 2
42 ECC Rec (01)04 - 1500 MHz 18CH @ 28MHz (520 MHz) 3
- Digital fixed point to point EN 301 128
- Climatic characteristics EN 300 019 (class 4.1 for ODU;

storage: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)
- Safety EN60950
MN.00273.E - 006 23
6.2 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
- Tx power see Tab.3
- Tolerance ± 2dB
Tab.3 - Tx power
ALFOplus series Nominal output power (dBm)
Frequency Band a
4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAMa. 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM
(GHz)
6 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 23
7 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 23
8 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 23
10.5 28 28 25 25 24 24 24 24 24 23
11 27 27 24 24 23 23 23 23 23 22
13 27 27 24 24 23 23 23 23 23 22
15 27 27 24 24 23 23 23 23 23 22
17 22 22 20 20 18 18 18 18 18 17
18 23 23 21 21 19 19 19 19 19 18
23 23 23 21 21 19 19 19 19 19 18
26 22 22 20 20 18 18 18 18 18 17
28 21 21 19 19 17 17 17 17 17 16
32 20 20 18 18 16 16 16 16 16 15
38 19 19 17 17 15 15 15 15 15 14
42 17 17 15 15 13 13 13 13 13 12
a. Please, note that in modulation with s-suffix (strong), the applied FEC redundancy is higher, thus with more strength against
fading and interference. Where no suffix is reported, that applied FEC redundancy is lower; this maximizes the transported ca-
pacity.
3, 4
- RF output attenuation up to 20 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable
4
- Automatic transmit power control (ATPC range) 20 dB, implemented in 1dB step
4
- Remote transmit power control (RTPC range) 20 dB
- Transmitter return loss GB8000 15 dB

GB9000 6 dB
- Stability in frequency ±5ppm, ±10ppm (including ageing)
- Muting 60dB, related to maximum transmitted power
- Receiver threshold see Tab.4
3 ALFOplus17 and ALFOplus17 extended dynamic can comply with CEPT/ERC/REC70-03 (EIRP 100mW)
by enabling Tx power reduction via software.
4 ALFOplus17 extended dynamic allows 40 dB of transmit power attenuation in 1 dB step.
24 MN.00273.E - 006
Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled)
Radio Nominal RSL

Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
4SQAM 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1KQAM
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5
7
BER=10-10 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
-6
BER=10 -94.5 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -83.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -67.5
10
BER=10-10 -92.5 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5
BER=10-6 -94.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5
14
BER=10-10 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0
28
-10
BER=10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5
30
-10
BER=10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
-6
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5
56
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
6 GHz
Radio Guaranteed RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
7
BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
-6
BER=10 -92.5 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5
10
BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
14
-10
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
28
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
-6
BER=10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
30
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
56
-10
BER=10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
MN.00273.E - 006 25
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.5 -93.0 -89.5 -86.5 -84.5 -82.0 -78.5 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5
7
-10
BER=10 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
BER=10-6 -94.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5
14
BER=10-10 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -80.0 -77.0 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -64.0
28
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -60.5
56
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
7 GHz
Radio Guaranteed RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
7
BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
-6
BER=10 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
14
BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
28
-10
BER=10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
56
BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
26 MN.00273.E - 006
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0
7
-10
BER=10 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5
BER=10-6 -94.0 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.0
10
BER=10-10 -92.0 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0
-6
BER=10 -94.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0
14
BER=10-10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
BER=10-6 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5
28
BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -63.0
30
-10
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -61.5
40
-10
BER=10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
56
11 BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
GHz Radio Guaranteed RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
-6
BER=10 -92.0 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0
10
BER=10-10 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
14
-10
BER=10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
-6
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
30
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5
40
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
MN.00273.E - 006 27
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0
7
-10
BER=10 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
BER=10-6 -94.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0
14
BER=10-10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
-6
BER=10 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5
28
BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
56
13 BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
-6
BER=10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
28
-10
BER=10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
28 MN.00273.E - 006
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -95.0 -92.5 -89.0 -86.0 -84.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0
7
-10
BER=10 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
BER=10-6 -94.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.0
14
BER=10-10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
-6
BER=10 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -63.5
28
BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
56
15 BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
-6
BER=10 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
28
-10
BER=10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
MN.00273.E - 006 29
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
7
-10
BER=10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
14
BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
28
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
56
17 BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
7
BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 76.0 72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
14
BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
28
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
56
BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.4
30 MN.00273.E - 006
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5
7
-10
BER=10 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
BER=10-6 -93.5 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5
10
BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
-6
BER=10 -93.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5
14
BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
20
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -63.0
28
-10
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0 -66.5 -62.5
30
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.0
40
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
50
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5
56
-10
18 BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
7
-10
BER=10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
20
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
28
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
30
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -89.0
40
-10
BER=10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
-6
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
56
-10
BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
MN.00273.E - 006 31
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -94.5 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -83.5 -81.0 -77.5 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5
7
-10
BER=10 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
BER=10-6 -93.5 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -66.5
10
BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
-6
BER=10 -93.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -65.5
14
BER=10-10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
20
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -79.0 -76.0 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -63.0
28
-10
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.0 -66.5 -62.5
30
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.0
40
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.0
50
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5
56
-10
23 BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
7
-10
BER=10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
20
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
28
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
30
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -89.0
40
-10
BER=10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
-6
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
56
-10
BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
32 MN.00273.E - 006
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0
7
-10
BER=10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
-6
BER=10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5
28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
56
26 BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
7
BER=10-10 -89.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0
-6
BER=10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
14
BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
28
-10
BER=10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.5
BER=10-6 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
56
BER=10-10 -82.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.0 -70.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.0 -58.5 -54.0
MN.00273.E - 006 33
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5
7
-10
BER=10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
14
BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0
28
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
56
28 BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
7
BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
-6
BER=10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
14
BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
28
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
56
BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5
34 MN.00273.E - 006
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -92.0 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -81.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0
7
-10
BER=10 -90.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0
BER=10-6 -91.0 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0
10
BER=10-10 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
-6
BER=10 -91.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0
14
BER=10-10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.0 -65.0 -61.0
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
20
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5
-6
BER=10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
28
-10
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
30
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5
40
BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
-6
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
50
BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
BER=10-6 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
56
-10
32 BER=10 -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -90.0 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -79.0 -76.5 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0
7
-10
BER=10 -88.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
10
BER=10-10 -87.0 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
-6
BER=10 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.0 -74.5 -71.0 -68.0 -65.0 -61.0
14
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.0 -66.0 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5
20
-10
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.5 -57.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
28
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.5
-6
BER=10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
30
BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -56.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
40
-10
BER=10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5
BER=10-6 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
50
BER=10-10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5
-6
BER=10 -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0
56
-10
BER=10 -81.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -69.0 -66.5 -63.5 -60.0 -57.5 -53.0
MN.00273.E - 006 35
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5
7
-10
BER=10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5
10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
-6
BER=10 -91.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5
14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
20
BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
-6
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0
28
-10
BER=10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
30
-10
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0
40
BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
-6
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0
50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
56
-10
38 BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5 -77.5 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
7
-10
BER=10 -88.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
10
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
-6
BER=10 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
14
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
20
-10
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0 -71.5 -68.0 -65.0 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
28
BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -73.0 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -57.0
-6
BER=10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
30
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.5
BER=10-6 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
40
-10
BER=10 -83.0 -79.5 -76.0 -73.0 -71.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.0 -59.5 -55.0
BER=10-6 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
50
BER=10-10 -82.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.0 -70.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.0 -58.5 -54.0
-6
BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5
56
-10
BER=10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5
36 MN.00273.E - 006
Radio Nominal RSL
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
7
-10
BER=10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
14
BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
-6
BER=10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
28
BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
56
42 BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5
Modulations
Threshold (dBm)
Channel bandwidth
MHz
BER=10-6 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
7
BER=10-10 -87.5 -85.0 -81.5 78.5 76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5
-6
BER=10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
14
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5 -72.0 -68.5 -65.5 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
28
-10
BER=10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -56.0
BER=10-6 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 54.5
56
BER=10-10 -80.5 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -68.5 -66.0 -63.0 -59.5 -57.0 -52.5
- Modulation 4QAM up to 1024QAM

- Number of settable RF channel depending on RF band and capacity
- Tuning frequency step 250 KHz
- Noise figure see Tab.5
Tab.5 - Noise figure
Frequency Band (GHz) Noise Figure (dB)
6 6
7 6
11 6.5
13 6.5
15 6.5
17 8
18 7
23 7
26 8.5
28 8
MN.00273.E - 006 37
Frequency Band (GHz) Noise Figure (dB)
32 9.5
38 9
42 10
- Link ID identifier RFOH: 1 to 255
- Special efficiency see Tab.6
Tab.6 - Spectral efficiency

a
Modulation ETSI class
4SQAM b 2
4QAM 2
16SQAM 4L
16QAM 4L
32QAM 4H
64QAM 4H
128QAM 5HB
256QAM 6LB
512QAM 6LB
1024QAM 7B
a. Reference draft ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V.2.1.4.1

(V.0.0.4/2011-07)
b. Modulation available on ACM, not selectable as ref-
erence modulation
- Spurious emissions/rejection according to ETSI
- Max RSL threshold see Tab.7
Tab.7 - Max RSL Thresold
Max receive signal level Threshold (dBm)
Without degradation -25
With degradation up to BER 10-6 -22
Without permanent damage -10
6.2.1 Adaptive modulation
ALFOplus ODU’s implement an adaptive modulation algorithm to improve the system gain when the quality
of the received signal become insufficient to guarantee an error free link.
Adaptive modulation guarantees error free and hitless unidirectional downshifts with fading speed up to 30
dB/s. Ethernet frames aren’t lost in case of upshift and downshift events.
The thresholds for ACM are shown in the Tab.8.
38 MN.00273.E - 006
Tab.8 - ACM switching thresholds
Power BER 10-6 Down-shift Margin Up-shift a Margin Up-shift b Margin

7MHz Bandwidth
(Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.) (Estim.)
4SQAM 0 6.4 13.2 13.2
4QAM 0 8.2 11.2 3 17.7 5 20.2 5.0
16SQAM -2.5 12.7 15.7 3 19.6 5 19.6 7.5
16QAM -2.5 14.6 17.6 3 22.2 5 23.5 5.0
32QAM -3.75 17.2 20.2 3 24.7 5 24.5 6.3
64QAM -3.5 19.7 22.7 3 27.8 5 27.8 4.8
128QAM -3.5 22.8 25.8 3 31 5 31.6 5.0
256QAM -4.125 26 29 3 34.1 5 34.1 5.6
512QAM -4.25 29.1 32.1 3 36.8 5 36.8 5.1
1KQAM -4.25 32.3 35.3 3 4.5 4.5
Power BER 10-6 Down-shift Margin Up-shift a. Margin Up-shift b. Margin

10MHz Bandwidth
4SQAM 0 6.4 0 0 13.2 0 13.2 0
4QAM 0 8.2 11.2 3 17.7 5 20.2 5.0
16SQAM -2.5 12.7 15.7 3 19.6 5 19.6 7.5
16QAM -2.5 14.6 17.6 3 22.2 5 23.45 5.0
32QAM -3.75 17.2 20.2 3 24.7 5 24.45 6.25
64QAM -3.5 19.7 22.7 3 27.8 5 27.8 4.75
128QAM -3.5 22.8 25.8 3 31 5 31.625 5.0
256QAM -4.125 26 29 3 34.1 5 34.1 5.625
512QAM -4.25 29.1 32.1 3 36.8 5 36.8 5.125
1KQAM -4.25 32.3 35.3 3 0 4.5 0 4.5

14MHz Bandwidth
4SQAM 0 5.8 13.2 13.2
4QAM 0 8.2 11.2 3 17.6 5.0 20.1 5.0
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.6 3 19.5 5.0 19.5 7.5
16QAM -2.5 14.5 17.5 3 22 5.0 23.3 5.0
32QAM -3.75 17 20 3 25.7 5.0 25.5 6.3
64QAM -3.5 19.7 23.2 3.5 27.7 6.0 27.7 5.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.7 3 30.8 5.0 31.4 5.0
256QAM -4.125 25.8 28.8 3 33.9 5.0 33.9 5.6

c
512QAM -4.25 28.9 31.9 3 36.7 5.0 36.7 5.1
d
1KQAM -4.25 32.2 35.2 3 4.5 4.5

20MHz Bandwidth
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
MN.00273.E - 006 39
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 23.1 3,5 27.2 6 27.2 5.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

28MHz Bandwidth
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 23.1 3,5 27.2 6.0 27.2 5.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

30MHz Bandwidth
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 25.6 4.5 25.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 23.1 3,5 27.2 6.0 27.2 5.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

40MHz Bandwidth
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
40 MN.00273.E - 006
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 22.6 3.0 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

50MHz Bandwidth
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 22.6 3.0 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5

56MHz Bandwidth
4SQAM 0 5.7 12.7 12.7
4QAM 0 8.2 10.7 2.5 17.1 4.5 19.6 4.5
16SQAM -2.5 12.6 15.1 2.5 18.9 4.5 18.9 7.0
16QAM -2.5 14.4 16.9 2.5 21.3 4.5 22.6 4.5
32QAM -3.75 16.8 19.3 2.5 24.6 4.5 24.4 5.8
64QAM -3.5 19.6 22.6 3 27.2 5.0 27.2 4.8
128QAM -3.5 22.7 25.2 2.5 30.2 4.5 30.8 4.5
256QAM -4.125 25.7 28.2 2.5 33.3 4.5 33.3 5.1
512QAM -4.25 28.8 31.3 2.5 36.5 4.5 36.5 4.6
1KQAM -4.25 32 34.5 2.5 4.5 4.5
a. Upshift thresholds in case of constant output

b. Upshift thresholds in case of output power depending on current modulation
c. ALFOplus42 = 36.2 dB
d. ALFOplus42 = 34.7 dB
MN.00273.E - 006 41
6.3 LINE INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS
The line interfaces (LAN1, LAN2) are connected to an embedded Ethernet switch. Ethernet traffic is for-
warded to the radio interface through a 1 Gbps port, baseband and modem processing blocks. Network
synchronism can be acquired and provided by each Ethernet switch port (see Fig.6).
Microcontroller
Ethernet
packet switch
10/100/1000BaseT or
LAN1 Port A
100/1000BaseX Radio
1000BaseX 1+0
10/100/1000BaseT
LAN2
Fig.6 - ALFOplus block diagram
6.3.1 Ethernet electrical interface characteristics
All ports can be “transmitters or sources” of the synchronism through Synchronous Ethernet.
- Ethernet connectors LAN1 IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000BaseT RJ45

LAN2 IEEE 802.3 10/100/1000BaseT RJ45
- Ethernet cable category CAT5/CAT6
- Ethernet cable max length 100m
- Power over Ethernet 5 IEEE 802af PoE
- Ethernet latency see Tab.9
5 Maximum power excluded.
42 MN.00273.E - 006
Tab.9 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus
One way delay (msec) Packet size 64 bytes
Bandwidth (MHz) 4QAM 16SQAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1K QAM
7 1.100 1.083 1.069 1.064 1.060 1.056 1.054 1.051 1.049
10 0.925 0.914 0.904 0.900 0.897 0.894 0.893 0.980 0.889
14 0.649 0.641 0.634 0.632 0.629 0.627 0.626 0.625 0.624
20 0.464 0.459 0.453 0.451 0.450 0.449 0.448 0.447 0.447
28 0.329 0.325 0.321 0.320 0.319 0.318 0.318 0.317 0316
30 0.311 0.306 0.304 0.303 0.302 0.302 0.300 0.300 0.299
40 0.237 0.233 0.232 0.231 0.230 0.230 0.229 0.229 0.228
50 0.193 0.190 0.188 0.188 0.186 0.186 0.186 0.186 0.186
56 0.170 0.168 0.166 0.166 0.165 0.164 0.164 0.164 0.163
7 1.148 1.120 1.095 1.088 1.078 1.071 1.068 1.063 1.060
10 0.960 0.940 0.922 0.916 0.909 0.905 0.903 0.900 0.898
14 0.674 0.660 0.648 0.644 0.639 0.636 0.634 0.632 0.630
20 0.483 0.473 0.464 0.461 0.458 0.456 0.455 0.453 0.451
28 0.342 0.335 0.329 0.327 0.324 0.323 0.322 0.321 0.321
30 0.323 0.293 0.289 0.283 0.285 0.283 0.282 0.282 0.303
40 0.266 0.241 0.238 0.233 0.235 0.233 0.232 0.232 0.231
50 0.201 0.197 0.193 0.192 0.191 0.190 0.190 0.189 0.188
56 0.177 0.174 0.171 0.169 0.169 0.168 0.167 0.167 0.167
7 1.247 1.194 1.146 1.132 1.114 1.101 1.095 1.087 1.081
10 1.030 0.993 0.960 0.950 0.937 0.929 0.925 0.919 0.913
14 0.723 0.697 0.674 0.666 0.658 0.652 0.649 0.645 0.641
20 0.517 0.499 0.482 0.478 0.472 0.467 0.466 0.463 0.456
28 0.367 0.354 0.342 0.339 0.335 0.332 0.331 0.329 0.327
30 0.347 0.330 0.324 0.321 0.317 0.313 0.303 0.310 0.309
40 0.266 0.253 0.248 0.246 0.243 0.240 0.232 0.238 0.237
50 0.216 0.209 0.203 0.200 0.198 0.196 0.196 0.195 0.193
56 0.191 0.185 0.179 0.177 0.175 0.173 0.172 0.172 0.171
7 1.438 1.338 1.247 1.218 1.185 1.163 1.151 1.133 1.124
MN.00273.E - 006 43
10 1.167 1.096 1.032 1.013 0.989 0.973 0.965 0.952 0.944
14 0.820 0.770 0.725 0.712 0.695 0.684 0.678 0.669 0.664
20 0.587 0.553 0.521 0.511 0.499 0.492 0.488 0.482 0.478
28 0.418 0.393 0.371 0.364 0.356 0.350 0.347 0.343 0.341
30 0.394 0.364 0.351 0.343 0.336 0.330 0.328 0.325 0.323
40 0.303 0.280 0.270 0.264 0.258 0.254 0.252 0.250 0.247
50 0.246 0.233 0.220 0.216 0.212 0.209 0.207 0.205 0.203
56 0.218 0.206 0.195 0.191 0.187 0.185 0.183 0.181 0.179
7 1.824 1.628 1.450 1.395 1.329 1.284 1.261 1.228 1.208
10 1.443 1.305 1.181 1.143 1.096 1.065 1.049 1.026 1.007
14 1.014 0.917 0.830 0.803 0.770 0.748 0.737 0.721 0.711
20 0.726 0.658 0.597 0.579 0.556 0.540 0.532 0.521 0.513
28 0.519 0.470 0.426 0.414 0.397 0.386 0.380 0.372 0.368
30 0.489 0.432 0.405 0.392 0.377 0.368 0.360 0.363 0.348
40 0.376 0.332 0.311 0.301 0.290 0.283 0.277 0.279 0.269
50 0.307 0.280 0.256 0.248 0.239 0.233 0.229 0.225 0.221
56 0.272 0.248 0.227 0.220 0.212 0.206 0.203 0.200 0.197
7 2.193 1.905 1.644 1.562 1.466 1.400 1.367 0.001 1.289
10 1.707 1.505 1.322 1.265 1.197 1.151 1.127 1.092 1.066
14 1.200 1.058 0.929 0.890 0.842 0.809 0.792 0.768 0.754
20 0.860 0.761 0.671 0.643 0.609 0.588 0.576 0.559 0.545
28 0.615 0.544 0.480 0.460 0.436 0.420 0.412 0.399 0.393
30 0.580 0.499 0.460 0.441 0.419 0.403 0.393 0.385 0.372
40 0.433 0.381 0.351 0.337 0.320 0.308 0.300 0.294 0.289
50 0.365 0.325 0.288 0.277 0.264 0.255 0.250 0.246 0.239
56 0.324 0.289 0.257 0.247 0.235 0.227 0.223 0.219 0.214
7 8.570 6.698 5.001 4.471 3.844 3.417 3.196 2.874 2.692
10 6.271 4.959 3.769 3.399 2.958 2.659 2.505 2.280 2.101
14 4.418 3.493 2.655 2.394 2.084 1.873 1.764 1.606 1.516
20 3.171 2.532 1.953 1.773 1.559 1.414 1.338 1.228 1.123
44 MN.00273.E - 006
28 2.284 1.824 1.407 1.277 1.123 1.018 0.964 0.885 0.840
30 2.155 1.608 1.352 1.234 1.093 0.996 0.928 0.875 0.801
40 1.670 1.246 1.048 0.956 0.847 0.772 0.719 0.678 0.646
50 1.371 1.114 0.881 0.809 0.722 0.664 0.634 0.590 0.552
56 1.227 0.997 0.789 0.724 0.646 0.594 0.567 0.528 0.505
- Guaranteed Ethernet throughput see Tab.10
Tab.10 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression
and fragmentation
Frame size (byte)

Bandwidth (MHz) Modulation
64 128 256 512 1024 1518 10000
4QAMs 10.3 9.8 9.6 9.4 9.4 9.3 9.3
4QAM 12.0 11.5 11.2 11.0 11.0 10.9 10.9
16QAMs 17.9 17.2 16.7 16.5 16.4 16.3 16.2
16QAM 23.3 22.3 21.7 21.4 21.2 21.2 21.1
32QAM 27.1 25.9 25.2 24.9 24.7 24.6 24.5

7
64QAM 33.5 32.0 31.2 30.8 30.5 30.5 30.3
128QAM 39.9 38.2 37.2 36.7 36.4 36.3 36.1
256QAM 46.3 44.3 43.2 42.6 42.2 42.1 41.9
512QAM 52.8 50.5 49.2 48.5 48.1 48.0 47.8
1024QAM 59.2 56.6 55.2 54.4 54.0 53.9 53.6
4QAMs 12.6 12.1 11.7 11.6 11.5 11.5 11.4
4QAM 16.9 16.2 15.8 15.6 15.4 15.4 15.3
16QAMs 25.3 24.2 23.6 23.2 23.1 23.0 22.9
16QAM 32.8 31.4 30.6 30.2 29.9 29.9 29.7
32QAM 38.2 36.5 35.5 35.0 34.8 34.7 34.5

10
64QAM 47.2 45.1 44.0 43.4 43.0 42.9 42.7
128QAM 56.3 53.8 52.4 51.7 51.3 51.2 50.9
256QAM 65.3 62.5 60.9 60.0 59.5 59.4 59.1
512QAM 74.4 71.1 69.3 68.3 67.8 67.6 67.3
1024QAM 83.4 79.8 77.7 76.6 76.1 75.9 75.5
MN.00273.E - 006 45
Frame size (byte)
64 128 256 512 1024 1518 10000
4QAMs 18.1 17.3 16.9 16.6 16.5 16.5 16.4
4QAM 24.3 23.3 22.7 22.4 22.2 22.1 22.0
16QAMs 36.3 34.7 33.9 33.4 33.1 33.0 32.9
16QAM 47.2 45.1 44.0 43.4 43.0 42.9 42.7
32QAM 54.8 52.4 51.1 50.4 50.0 49.9 49.6

14
64QAM 67.8 64.9 63.2 62.3 61.8 61.7 61.4
128QAM 80.8 77.3 75.3 74.3 73.7 73.5 73.2
256QAM 93.8 89.8 87.4 86.2 85.6 85.4 85.0
512QAM 106.9 102.3 99.6 98.2 97.5 97.3 96.8
1024QAM 120.0 114.7 111.8 110.2 109.4 109.1 108.6
4QAMs 25.7 24.6 23.9 23.6 23.4 23.4 23.3
4QAM 34.5 33.0 32.1 31.7 31.5 31.4 31.2
16QAMs 51.5 49.2 48.0 47.3 46.9 46.8 46.6
16QAM 66.9 64.0 62.3 61.4 61.0 60.8 60.6
32QAM 77.7 74.3 72.4 71.4 70.8 70.7 70.3

20
64QAM 96.1 91.9 89.6 88.3 87.6 87.4 87.0
128QAM 114.6 109.6 106.7 105.2 104.4 104.2 103.7
256QAM 133.0 127.2 123.9 122.2 121.3 121.0 120.4
512QAM 151.4 144.8 141.1 139.1 138.1 137.7 137.1
1024QAM 169.9 162.5 158.3 156.0 154.9 154.5 153.8
4QAMs 36.4 34.8 33.9 33.5 33.2 33.1 33.0
4QAM 48.9 46.8 45.6 45.0 44.6 44.5 44.3
16QAMs 73.0 69.9 68.1 67.1 66.6 66.4 66.1
16QAM 94.9 90.8 88.4 87.2 86.5 86.3 85.9
32QAM 110.2 105.4 102.7 101.2 100.5 100.2 99.8

28
64QAM 136.4 130.4 127.1 125.3 124.3 124.0 123.5
128QAM 162.5 155.4 151.4 149.3 148.2 147.8 147.2
256QAM 188.7 180.4 175.8 173.3 172.0 171.6 170.8
512QAM 215.0 205.6 200.3 197.5 196.0 195.5 194.7
1024QAM 241.2 230.7 224.7 221.5 219.9 219.3 218.4
46 MN.00273.E - 006
Frame size (byte)
64 128 256 512 1024 1518 10000
4QAMs 38.8 37.1 36.2 35.7 35.4 35.3 35.1
4QAM 52.2 49.9 48.6 47.9 47.5 47.4 47.2
16QAMs 77.8 74.4 72.5 71.5 71.0 70.8 70.5
16QAM 101.1 96.7 94.2 92.9 92.2 92.0 91.6
32QAM 117.4 112.3 109.4 107.9 107.1 106.8 106.3

30
64QAM 145.3 139.0 135.4 133.5 132.5 132.2 131.6
128QAM 173.2 165.6 161.4 159.1 157.9 157.5 156.8
256QAM 201.0 192.3 187.3 184.7 193.3 182.8 182.0
512QAM 228.9 218.9 213.3 210.3 208.7 208.2 207.3
1024QAM 256.8 245.6 239.2 235.9 234.1 233.5 232.5
4QAMs 64.2 61.4 59.8 59.0 58.5 58.4 58.1
4QAM 86.2 82.5 80.4 79.2 78.6 78.4 78.1
16QAMs 128.7 123.1 119.9 118.2 117.4 117.1 116.5
16QAM 167.2 159.9 155.8 153.6 152.5 152.1 151.4
32QAM 194.2 185.8 181.0 178.4 177.1 176.6 175.9

40
64QAM 240.3 229.8 223.9 220.7 219.1 218.6 217.6
128QAM 286.4 273.9 266.9 263.1 261.1 260.5 259.3
256QAM 332.5 318.0 309.8 305.4 303.1 302.4 301.1
512QAM 378.6 362.1 352.7 347.7 345.2 344.3 342.8
1024QAM 424.7 406.2 395.7 390.1 387.2 386.2 384.5
4QAMs 64.2 61.4 59.8 59.0 58.5 58.4 58.1
4QAM 86.2 82.5 80.4 79.2 78.6 78.4 78.1
16QAMs 128.7 123.1 119.9 118.2 117.4 117.1 116.5
16QAM 167.2 159.9 155.8 153.6 152.5 152.1 151.4
32QAM 194.2 185.8 181.0 178.4 177.1 176.6 175.9

50
64QAM 240.3 229.8 223.9 220.7 219.1 218.6 217.6
128QAM 286.4 273.9 266.9 263.1 261.1 260.5 259.3
256QAM 332.5 318.0 309.8 305.4 303.1 302.4 301.1
512QAM 378.6 362.1 352.7 347.7 345.2 344.3 342.8
1024QAM 424.7 406.2 395.7 390.1 387.2 386.2 384.5
MN.00273.E - 006 47
Frame size (byte)
64 128 256 512 1024 1518 10000
4QAMs 72.8 69.7 67.9 66.9 66.4 66.3 66.0
4QAM 97.6 93.6 91.2 89.9 89.2 89.0 88.6
16QAMs 146.1 139.7 136.1 134.2 133.2 132.9 132.3
16QAM 189.8 191.5 176.8 174.3 173.0 172.6 171.8
32QAM 220.4 210.8 205.4 202.5 201.0 200.5 199.6

56
64QAM 272.7 260.8 254.1 250.5 248.7 248.0 246.9
128QAM 325.0 310.9 302.8 298.6 296.3 295.6 294.3
256QAM 377.3 360.9 351.6 346.6 344.0 343.2 341.7
512QAM 430.0 411.3 400.7 395.0 392.1 391.1 389.4
1024QAM 482.3 461.3 449.4 443.0 439.7 438.7 436.7
48 MN.00273.E - 006
6.3.2 Ethernet optical interface characteristics
The optical interface can be specialized for the different applications by insertion of the proper transceiver
on the unit.
• Gigabit optical Ethernet connector: LAN1 SFP 100/1000BaseX
• Fiber max length depending on SFP module (see Tab.11)
Tab.11 - Interface characteristics
Gigabit 100 Mbit/s
Parameter Single Mode Multi Mode Multi Mode
9/125 µm 50/125 µm 62.5/125 µm 50/125 µm 62.5/125 µm
Operating Distance up to 10km up to 550m up to 2km
Optical Center Wavelength 1310 nm 850 nm 1310 nm
Optical Transmit Power -3 ÷ -9.5 dBm -2 ÷ -9.5 dBm -14 ÷ -22 dBm
Receive Sensitivity -19 dBm -17 dBm -29 dBm
Average Receive Power

-3 dBm 0 dBm -14 dBm
Max
Link Power Budget 9.5 dB 7.5 dB 7 dB
1000BaseLX 1000BaseSX
Compliance 100BaseFx IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3z
Transceiver Type SFP plug-in
Connectors Type LC
6.4 POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE
ALFOplus unit is compatible with standard POE IEEE 802.3af (with exceeding maximum power). Power sup-
ply can be provided at the LAN1 (ALFOplus GE) or LAN2 (ALFOplus GO).
In case of external PoE injector, verify that it has overcurrent protection. Power supply can be provided at
the LAN interface or at an auxiliary separated connector at the same time. The maximum length of CAT5e
cable (that carries data+PoE) is 100m.
- Operating voltage range 48Vdc ±15%
- Power consumption 6 see Tab.12
Tab.12 - Power consumption (W)
Power consumption (W)
Frequency band Typical Guaranteed
6 t.b.d. t.b.d.
7 37 39
6 Power consumption with negligible cable length.
MN.00273.E - 006 49
Power consumption (W)
Frequency band Typical Guaranteed
8 37 39
11 35 37
13 37 39
15 37 39
17 37 39
18 33.5 35
23 33.5 35
26 33.5 35
32 t.b.d. t.b.d.
38 34 36
42 34 36
In any case, for other different needs, a dedicated auxiliary port (5 pin connector) provides power supply
48Volt (see Fig.68). For installation, please use rugged and waterproof cable.
6.4.1 PoE injector
Tab.13 - PoE injector supported
Code Description
S03653 AC/DC 60W PoE injector
S03654 DC/DC 75W PoE injector
6.4.1.1 PoE injector functionality
The equipment presented in this paragraph is a SIAE IDU that provides power to the ODU ALFOplus
through the LAN cable.
SIAE Passive PoE Injector is a complete power management hot-swap (over-current protection, excess-
voltage and under-voltage lockout). The Ethernet traffic from “DATA” connector (input) is overlaid with
power supply 48Volt into “DATA&Power” connector (Output).
The alarm indicators (LEDs) on the data connector are not used and are always off (see Fig.9 PoE injector
interface).
50 MN.00273.E - 006
Fig.7 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector)
Fig.8 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector)
6.4.1.2 Code table
Tab.14 - Code Table
Code Description
C60507 48 Vin 2 ports PoE injector
C60506 48Vin 4 ports PoE injector
MN.00273.E - 006 51
6.4.1.3 Electrical characteristics
Tab.15 - Electrical characteristics
Vin 36..72Vdc (floating/pos. GND)
Iin (without ODU) 60mA (C60507), 120mA (C60506)
Alarm cable open on Iout=50mA ±20%
Alarm cable open off Iout=70mA ±20%
Iout MAX (per port) 1.45A ±10%
Inrush current ETS 300 132-2 mask compliant
Surge protection IEC 1000-4-5 Level 4 4KV compliant
6.4.1.4 Connectors
Tab.16 - Connectors
Power supply 3 contacts plug P.3.81
ODU RJ45
Default polarity RJ45 V+(4.5) V-(7.8)
Optional polarity RJ45 V+(3.6) V-(1.2)
6.4.1.5 Description of alarms
Tab.17 - Description of alarms
Alarm LED (yellow) Power LED (green) Meaning
On On Cable open
Off On Remote Power supply is OK
Blinking Off Cable short circuit
Fig.9 - PoE injector interface
52 MN.00273.E - 006
6.5 WAVEGUIDE FLANGE
- Flange type see Tab.18
Tab.18 - Flange type
Frequency band (GHz) Flange type
6 UBR 70
7 UBR 84
8 UBR 84
11 UBR 100
13 UDR 120
15 UDR 140
17 UBR 140
18 UBR 220
23 UBR 220
25 UBR 220
32 UBR 320
38 UBR 320
42 UBR 500
- Maximum length see.Tab.19
Tab.19 - Maximum length
Waveguide maximum length
Channel spacing (m)
7 MHz 10
14 MHz 10
28 MHz 10
40 MHz 5
56 MHz 5
MN.00273.E - 006 53
6.6 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Physical size of system components:
Tab.20 - Dimensions
Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)
ALFOplus 254 254 121
Weight of system components:

- ALFOplus < 4.25 kg
6.7 SURGE AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
- Protection method: gas dischargers
- Gas discharger technical characteristics
- DC spark-over voltage 150V +/-20%

- Nominal impulse discharge
current (wave 8/20 µs) 20kA
- Single impulse discharge

current (wave 8/20 µs) 25kA
- Operation and storage temperature -40°C ÷ +90°C
- Performances in accordance to EN 301 489
6.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
- Operating temperature range –33°C ÷ +55°C
- Survival temperature range (reduce MTBF) -40°C ÷ +70°C
- Operational humidity weatherproof according to IP65 environmental

class
- Thermal resistance thermal resistance 0.5°C/W

- Solar heat gain not exceeding 5°C
- Wind resistance 150 km/h (in operation)

200 km/h (survival)
Solar shield on the ODU guarantees an additional protection against temperature increase.
54 MN.00273.E - 006
7 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
7.1 GENERAL
SIAE ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) is a microwave radio system for Ethernet full-outdoor digital link.
ALFOplus (Access Link Full Outdoor) microwave radio system is available in various frequency ranges from
6 to 42 GHz.
The Outdoor Unit can be easily installed and configured:
• reduced size
• easily orientable antenna
• wide operating temperature range

• high flexibility of line interfaces selection
• low consumption.
The first description given in the following first concerns the circuitry common to all the versions, then that
of the line interfaces will follow.
7.1.1 Block diagram
The ALFOplus consists of two PCB housed in a small size aluminium cabinet:
• BBP-GE (Baseband processor Gigabit electrical)

• TRx (IF and RF transceiver)
or
• BBP-GO (Baseband processor Gigabit optical)

• TRx (IF and RF transceiver)
The description that follows (see Fig.10 and Fig.11) details the block diagrams of electrical and optical ver-
sion.
MN.00273.E - 006 55
56
.
CONN LO
Ge LAN2 Surge protection RAM
& magnetics
DA Filter
MOD
2xSync
DA Filter
SWD GMII FPGA
GMII
PW
Surge protection,
Ge LAN1
magnetics,
QSPI
Poe splitter ADC
MII
ADC °C
Aux Pwr Supply
PWM
Fig.10 - ALFOplus GE
Microcontroller
LO
Main DC/DC,
Aux DC/DC ADC Vga Filter Down converter,
DEM
RAM SSD Filter Agc
ADC Vga
BBP: base band processor

TRX: IF and RF transceiver
MN.00273.E - 006
MN.00273.E - 006
Go LAN1 (SFP 1000BaseX) RAM CONN. LO
DAC Filter
MOD
GMII DAC Filter
Surge GMII FPGA
Ge LAN2 protection, SWD GMII
magnetics, PHY PWM
PoE splitter
QSPI
ADC
MII
ADC °C
Aux Pwr Supply
PWM
Fig.11 - ALFOplus GO
Microcontroller
LO
Main DC/DC,
Aux DC/DC ADC Vga Filter Down converter,
DEM
RAM SSD ADC Vga Filter Agc
BBP: base band processor TRX: IF and RF transceiver
57
7.1.2 Baseband processor
The baseband Processor (BBP) carries out the following operations:
• primary and secondary power supply
• line interfaces and protections
• baseband circuits and packets processing
• I and Q signals generation and sampling
• I, Q demodulator
• Rx baseband filtering
• Actuators and measurement points for TRx unit
• FPGA debug connector
• FPGA
• Controller
BBP unit is different depending on the interface type (electrical or optical).
7.1.3 TRX Transceiver unit
TRX Transceiver consists of the following functional blocks:
• power supply dedicated to microwave circuits

• Tx baseband filtering
• I, Q modulator
• frequency synthesizer
• microwave transmitter and receiver
• IF devices on Rx side
7.1.4 Switch function
By default the routing works on basis Mac Address (Layer 2), but it can be enabled on basis VLAN ID, in
Web Lct - Ethernet switch (Enh) - Common Parameters.
Take account the value of Max Packet Size (byte) when “802.1Q setting” is set as DISABLE or FALLBACK
the switch adds 4 Bytes for internal S_Tag. With 802.1Q setting in SECURE (that means that packet VID
must be contained in Virtual LAN table list, otherwise the packet is discarded), no internal TAGs are added.
Ethernet Speed/Duplex function
With electrical interface, in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan, Speed/Duplex can be manually or automatically
activated as half Duplex or Full Duplex 10/100/1000Base-T, while with optical interface, Speed Duplex can
be set as Full Duplex 100/1000Base-X.
Link Loss Forwarding
Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of Ethernet interface that propagates on data traffic.
If LLF is enabled, any linkdown alarm will generate the alarm status of Ethernet interface blocking any
transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports.
58 MN.00273.E - 006
With LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not
available and can temporarily re-route the traffic.
In same cases, the radio link failure can be unidirectional, for example when the local equipment has an
Rx signal failure but the remote Rx signal is OK (i.e. unidirectional radio full due to failure of a transmitter).
However, also in these cases there can be the need to shutdown the link in both directions even if there is
only a unidirectional link failure.
Using the bidirectional LLF feature, in case of LLF in the local equipment, the local equipment can notify
this LLF status to the remote equipment, shutting down the link on both directions.
Below it is reported an example of bidirectional LLF configuration (see Fig.12).
Fig.12 - Bidirectional LLF
MDI/MDIX cross-over
For each LAN interface, cross-over cable can be set in Web Lct - Baseband - Lan - Cable Crossover as:
• Auto - Lan recognizes automatically the connected cable type (Straight cable or Crossover cable)
• MDI (NIC) - Manual crossover wiring type T568A
• MDI-X (Switch) - Manual crossover wiring type T568B

With crossover cable it is necessary to use the same wiring format (MDI/MDI or MDI-x/MDI-x) on both
ends. In case of straight cable is the opposite (MDI/MDI-X or MDI-X/MDI).
VLAN functionality
ALFOplus works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag. Tag is made up with:
• a fixed word of 2 bytes

• 3 bits for priority according with 802.1p
• 1 fixed bit
• 12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according with 802.1q.

Switch cross-connections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only out-
put ports should be defined for any used VID. Vlan ID (VID) has a range from 1 to 4095.
Ethernet Flow Control (802.3x)
A network device asks its adjacent devices to send a pause frame because the input is faster it can process.
The protocol used for this purpose is the flow control (802.3x).
Port Based VLan
Port Based VLan (or Lan Per Port) allows to share the Ethernet traffic (Ingress or Egress) in the internal
SIAE switch.
MN.00273.E - 006 59
7.1.5 Synchronisation unit (SETS)
Into ALFOplus a synchronisation circuit, called SETS (Synchronous Equipment Timing Source), gets the
synchronisation signal from the following different sources:
• LAN1
• LAN2
• radio
• Internal source
From the synchronization sources the reference clock is chosen on the base of alarm roots (Synch Loss,
Synch Drift, Holdover Freerunning), on the base of assigned priority, manual forcing and preferential
switch (see Fig.13).
The selected clock drives an oscillator through a PLL circuit. The oscillator will generate the required syn-
chronisation for the frame generation. If no input signals are available the internal oscillator source is used
for the local restart.
Alarms
Synchronisation Clock Selector Sync Loss
Source
Sync Drift
Status
TE LAN-1
TE LAN-2
T0 Reference
T2 Radio Clk PLL
Circuit
Internal Clock
Selection Logical
Force Switch
Priority Control
Preferential Switch
Fig.13 - Synchronisation block diagram
60 MN.00273.E - 006
7.1.6 Adaptive code modulation
ACM profiles
In ALFOplus radio family uses Adaptive Code and Modulation (ACM) in order to employ the correct modu-
lation profile depending on the Rx signal quality.
Available ACM profiles are the following:
• 4QAM strong
• 4QAM
• 16QAM strong
• 16QAM
• 32QAM
• 64QAM
• 128QAM
• 256QAM
• 512QAM
• 1024QAM.
These profiles operate in an RF channel with the following bandwidth:
• 7 MHz
• 10 MHz
• 14 MHz
• 20 MHz
• 28 MHz
• 30 MHz
• 40 MHz
• 50 MHz
• 56 MHz.
ACM switching
The criteria defining the necessity of an ACM switching, upshift or downshift, is the Rx S/N ratio.
• Upshift - When there is an increase of received S/N, the modulation complexity is increased in the
direction from 4QAM strong to 1024QAM increasing the spectral efficiency
• Downshift - When there is a decrease of received S/N, the modulation is reduced in the direction
from 1024QAM to 4QAM strong reducing the spectral efficiency,
In order to configure properly the radio link using ACM facility, an optimization must be found between
max traffic during good propagation conditions and max availability during bad propagation conditions. To
obtain this purpose the ACM in ALFOplus family can be configured via software setting the following pa-
rameters: ACM setting and Tx Power mode.
ACM setting
The ACM can vary modulation profiles between two extremes defined by the operator through software
configuration: Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation.
• Upper modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the better condition (high
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the maximum throughput defined at Upper Modulation: the
highest modulation profile that ACM can employ
MN.00273.E - 006 61
• Lower modulation - When propagation into the given radio channel is in the worst condition (low
Rx S/N), the radio link is working at the minimum throughput, defined at Lower Modulation: the
lowest modulation profile that ACM can employ
Tx Power Ramp
Tx Power Ramp function permits to set Tx power according to the available modulation profiles.
• Tx Power Ramp Disabled - Tx power is the same at any modulation profile
• Tx Power Ramp Enabled - Maximum Tx power based on the reference modulation
The Tx Power Ramp is set depending on the modulation license of the user and depending on the Lower
Modulation that has been set.
7.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction
The Automatic Transmission Power Control (ATPC) regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter
depending on the value of the RF level at the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local
terminal as threshold high and low. The difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher
than 3 dB.
As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low due to the increase of the hop atten-
uation, a microprocessor (µP), embedded in the ALFOplus, at the receiver side of the remote terminal
sends back to the local terminal a control to increase the transmitted power.
A good set of the thresholds is to put the ATPC Low Level threshold higher (or even slightly higher) than
the threshold of the highest modulation scheme of the ACM; this way, the ATPC start to work before than
the received signal is reduced and by consequence will force the system to downgrade the modulation. The
behaviour of the system is to always try to increase the PTX and so the System Gain, before than being
forced to reduce capacity due to modulation downgrade.
Resuming, the correct setting of the thresholds is when the two windows, the ATPC one and the ACM one,
are not overlapped, as per Fig.14.
62 MN.00273.E - 006
Local Remote
Remote PRx
dBm Tx Rx
PTx actuation PRx recording

level
µP µP
PTx control
Thresh High
Transmission
Rx Tx
Thresh Low of PTx control
Threshold
highest ACM
profile
ACM
range
Hop attenuation (dB)

Local PTx
dBm
PTx max.
ATPC range
PTx min.
Hop attenuation (dB)
Fig.14 - ATPC diagram
MN.00273.E - 006 63
7.2 LOOPS
To control the equipment correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The com-
mands are forwarded by the WEBLCT program. The available loop facilities are:
• Line Loop (Ethernet Port Loop)

• Baseband loop
PHYSICAL ALFOplus
ETHERNET
PORT
BBP-GE RADIO
Tx
BASE
LINE
BAND
LOOP
LOOP
Rx
Fig.15 - Available loops
7.3 LOGICAL PROCESSING FUNCTIONS FOR ETHERNET PAYLOAD
The description of Ethernet processing in the present document is made using a set of logical blocks that
represent the processing stages of a frame entering the L2 switch (it is intended to be just logical; it does
not represent the structure of the physical implementation).
Egress Manipulation
Scheduling
Shaping
Ingress Manipulation
Queue
Metering & Policing
Forwarding
Service Mapping
Ingress Filtering
Classification &
Phy layer
Fig.16 - Logical processing functions for Ethernet payload
From left to right the pocket processing is represented from Ingress to Egress.
64 MN.00273.E - 006
Tab.21 - Logical functions
Logical function Description of included functionalities Examples
Physical Layer Management of the phy parameters and charac-

management teristics if the physical interfaces.
Filter/drop frames on the base of specified crite-

Ingress Filtering ria and rules, ingress port rate limiting, storm
control.
All the frames with C-VID =

Defines the association rules between an ingress
Service Instance Mapping 10 ore mapped to the
frame and its VLAN/EVC
EVC-2
All the packets ingressing

An Internal-Priority is assigned to the packed on
Classification port 1 have the highest
the base of selected criteria.
priority
It measures the service parameters such as oc-

Metering & Policing CIR, EIR....definition
cupied bandwidth, rate, etc....
Ingress Manipulation & Modified the packet format: add/remove/pre-

Marking serve tags or modify the value of same fields
Determine the port/ports the packet shall egress On the base of DA-MAC, or
Forwarding
to. on the base of VID value.
Before egressing each packet is assigned to a

specific buffer selected in a set of N queues. Each
Queue & Congestion
queue has a different priority. Specific rules are
avoidance
used to determine if a packet can be added or
can be dropped.
The method adopted to empty the queues in or-

Scheduling Example: WFQ algorithm
der to fulfill the available bandwidth
The method adopted to shape the egressing

Shaping
packets.
Nodified the packet format: add/remove/pre-

Egress Manipulation serve tags or modify the value of some fields be-
fore egressing
7.3.1 Rate limiting
In SIAE equipment it is possible to apply the Rate Limit, i.e. to limit the total rate passing through an in-
terface. It is possible to apply the rate limiting from 64 kbit/s up to the maximum port speed (up to 1GE).
The values that can be inserted are pre-fixed from 64 kbit up to 10Mbit (64Kb, 128kb, 256kb, 512kb, 1Mb,
2Mb, 3Mb, 4Mb, 5Mb, 6Mb, 7Mb, 8Mb and 9Mb), In the range from 100Mbit/s up to 1Gbit/s the limiting
values can be chosen by the user with a 10Mbit/s step. i.e. the minimum selectable granularity is 10Mb/s.
7.3.2 Enhanced QoS Management
The SIAE switch scheduler provides enhanced QoS management features. Based on the ingress port (and
optionally also as a function of the VLAN-ID), there are four different modes that can be used to set the
priority of an Ethernet frame:
• Ethernet: the priority is set based on the PCP (Priority Code Point) field of the VLAN tag
(IEEE802.1p) (Native 802.1p C_Vid)
• MPLS: the priority is set based on the EXP (Experimental Bit) field of the MPLS tag (Native MPLS)
MN.00273.E - 006 65
• IP: the priority is set based on the DSCP field of the either IPv4 or IPv6 (Native ToS/DSCP)
• Default: the priority is set in a static mode and its value is configurable based on the Entering LAN
interface. This Default configuration is a “Port Based” Priority with default priority value of 0 (lowest
priority). These priority values can be configured by the user within the range from 0 (lowest prior-
ity) up to 7 (higher priority). The Default mode is also used when all the other criteria are not ap-
plicable.
It is in addition possible to map the EXP quality of the MPLS label into the PCP field of the outer VLAN tag
(802.1p Rewrite with MPLS).
7.3.3 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to MEF 10.2)
SIAE equipment allows limiting the ingress traffic rate on the basis of:
• LAN port (Bandwidth profile per UNI): a different profile is defined for each LAN port (VLAN ID and
priority are not considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm)
• VLAN (Bandwidth profile per EVC): a different profile is defined for different VLANs (priority is not
considered in this case by the rate limiting algorithm). Up to 64 VLAN can be managed with different
profiles.
• VLAN + priority (Bandwidth profile per CoS): a different profile is defined for different couples
VLAN+priorities (up to 64 different cases can be managed). In this case the packet priority is always
considered by the rate limiting algorithm. More than one priority can be included in the same band-
width profile.
7.3.3.1 Not registered traffic default colour
Green (MEF Compliant)/Red policy
Refer to the Fig.17.
Fig.17 - Not registered traffic default colour

In case at least one CIR/EIR entry has been defined for filtering the traffic at a certain ingress port, the
user is allowed to specify the colour the not registered traffic has to marked with, i.e. all not registered
traffic could be marked as either “Green” or “Red” packets. In the latter case, the traffic will be immediately
discarded.
7.3.3.2 CIR/EIR configuration
In general different criteria can be defined for each port/VLAN/priority. Up to 64 Ingress Filtering Policy
resources can be defined and each bandwidth profile defined on the basis either of LAN port, VLAN or
VLAN+priority consumes 1 of such resources.
Basing on the above policies, it is possible to assign different traffic profiles (i.e. CIR/EIR profiles) to the
incoming Ethernet services.
66 MN.00273.E - 006
For example, it is possible to assign specific CIR/EIR policies basing on:
• the type of service (e.g, voice, signalling, data, etc..)
• the specific operator (e.g. in case the microvawe network is shared between 2 or more operators)
• the destination terminal (e.g. each NodeB can have a specific CIR/EIR profile)
In order to define the bandwidth profile, the following parameters must be configured:
• CIR (Committed Information rate): it is the admitted ingress rate (“green” coloured), with values
between 0 kbit/s and 1 Gbit/s
• CBS (Committed Burst size): it is the maximum size of the token bucket of the green packets, with
values between 0 byte and 128 kbyte.
• EIR (Excess Information Rate): it is maximum ingress rate admitted when possible (“yellow” col-
oured), with values between 0kbit/s and 1Gbit/s.
• EBS (Excess Burst size): it is maximum size of the token bucket of the yellow packets, with values
between 0 byte and 128 kbyte.
• CF (Coupling Flag): if enabled, the excess token (if any) charged into the green bucket are moved
into the yellow packet bucket.
Red packets, i.e. the ones exceeding the CIR+EIR rate, are automatically discarded. In other words, the
rate obtained with the sum of CIR+EIR is the maximum rate allowed to be transmitted.
7.3.4 Enhanced VLAN Management
The SIAE switch provides the following enhanced VLAN management features:
• VLAN rewriting
• Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority
VLAN rewriting
VLAN rewriting is a feature available on radio side that allows to rewrite the VID of C-TAG of the packet
received (uplink side) or sent (downlink side) by the switch.
On uplink side (packets received on LAN interface by the switch and sent to the radio) the VID can be re-
written on the basis of the following criteria:
- LAN port + C-VID: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis
of its original C-VID and the LAN port where it has been received.
- LAN port + C-VID + priority: new values of C-VID to be written into the packet can be configured
on the basis of its original C-VID + priority and the LAN port where it has been received.
On uplink side it is possible to configure for all the LAN ports up to 64 LAN port + C-VID or LAN port + C-
VID + priority criteria.
On downlink side (packets received on radio side and sent by the switch on the LAN interface):
• the VID can be rewritten on the basis of the C-VID of the received packet. I.e., new values of C-
VID to be written into the packet can be configured on the basis of its original C_VID. It is possible
to configure up to 64 C-VID criteria in downlink, independently by the uplink configuration.
• C-VID can be removed selectively. It is possible to select the C-VID, enable the option “Removed”
and select the Output interface. In other words on downlink side it is possible to select the C-VID
to be remove and the correspondent Output LAN.
Selective QinQ based on VLAN and IEEE 802.1p priority
VLAN staking (also named QinQ) is a feature that allows an Ethernet frame to include more than one IEEE
802.1Q TAG. The scope of VLAN staking is to differentiate the traffic at different levels when the packets
must cross networks managed by different entities.
The SIAE switch radio supports the Vlan staking. Once a packet enters into the radio it is possible to add
a new IEEE 802.1Q TAG. The VID of the new TAG can be set based on different criteria:
MN.00273.E - 006 67
- Ingress port of the packet
- C-VID and priority of the packet when received on the ingress port
The new TAG is added to the packet as a S-TAG. The Ethertype field of the TAG can be set either to stand-
ard values (0x88A8, 0x9100, 0x9200, 0x9300) or to any other custom values.
7.3.5 Congestion avoidance
The Congestion Avoidance is a method that permits to discard some frames before congestion occurs.
When the queue is full there is a congestion situation, this means that the resources are not enough to
serve all the packets and there is not enough room in the queue for more storage. In this case some packet
must be dropped. The choice of the dropping policy has different effects on the network. In case of con-
gestion, the TCP/IP protocol reduces the transmitting windows and therefore the amount of traffic trans-
mitted. The TCP/IP protocol increases the transmitting window very slowly to allow the network to solve
the congestion issues.
This means that, when congestion occurs, some selective dropping has to be done.
There are different policies of dropping that can be adopted:
• Tail: in this case the last packets that come to the full queue are dropped (default configuration)
• Queue: in this case all the queue is emptied, i.e. all the packets present in the Queue are dropped
• Red: Random Early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incoming packets are
dropped randomly regardless if the frames are marked yellow or green (for more details on yellow
or green frames please refer to the paragraph 7.3.3 Ingress filtering policy (CIR/EIR according to
MEF 10.2))
• WRed: Weighted Random early Discard: with this policy, before the Queue is full some incoming
packets are dropped randomly. First are dropped the packets coloured in yellow and then are
dropped the packet coloured in green, see Fig.18.
Fig.18 - Red curve

Once WRed is enabled the threshold of Smin Smax and Pmax for the Green and Yellow frames have to be set.
The value set the points of the curve shown in Fig.18. There are some predetermined profiles to be ena-
bled:
• Profile 1:
- Smin= 30
- Smax=60
68 MN.00273.E - 006
- Pmax=10
• Profile 2:
- Smin= 20
- Smax=40
- Pmax=10
These profiles can be set for the Yellow Frames (Y) and Green Frames (G) as well. These values represent:
• Smin: represents the threshold after which the switch starts dropping packets
• Sman and Pmax: are the thresholds that makes the curve of “Drop Percentage”/”Average Queue Oc-
cupation” change. After this point the dropping packets increase rapidly.
• “Red Gentle”: after the point represented by Smax and Pmax: the Drop percentage can increase to
a 100% (RED) or can linearly increase. the choice of how to increase, directly or linearly to a 100%
is manage by disabling or enabling the RED Gentle.
7.3.5.1 Extended buffer capability on the radio queues
The SIAE switch has been provided with an extended buffer capability on the radio queues, which allows
to assign up to 128 Mbit (16MByte) to a single queue.
The following buffer configurations are available on the 8 output queues of the radio port:
• the length of each queue is configurable from 128kbit to 128Mbit
• radio port has a total available buffer of 184 Mbit (23 Mbyte), so the sum of all the queue lengths
of a single radio port does not have to exceed this value.
7.3.6 Scheduling methods
Once the priority is assigned, the traffic in the queues is then emptied by menas of either Strict Priority or
Weighted Fair Queue algorithms. With the Strict Priority the highest priority takes always precedence. With
WFQ the available bandwidth is shared between the different priorities with configurable weights. It is in
addition possible to configure at the same time some queues as Strict Priority and the remaining as WFQ.
Going into details:
• Strict Priority: first, all the packets from the highest priority queue are transmitted, then all the
packets from the second queue, and so on.
• Weighted Fair Queueing (W.F.Q.): the packets are sent on the radio following a rule based on the
weight assigned to each Queue.
Each queue “i” with WFQ is given a weight (importance) Wi.
WFQ guarantees a minimum service rate to queue “i”
Ri = R*Wi/(W1+W2+....+Wn) [Rate of the queue i]
Where:
R = rate of the servant (capacity available on the MW link)
W i= weight of the Queue taken in consideration
Wn = weight of the last Queue with WFQ enabled
This means that the rate of the queue is a fraction of the total bandwidth that depends
on the weight assigned to the Queue.
For example if the weights are set as Fig.19.
MN.00273.E - 006 69
Fig.19 -
Means that the Serving Priority of the frames present in the queues will be:
• the packets present in the Queue 7 will be transmitted with a Race 8/35
• the packets present in the Queue 6 will be transmitted with a race 8/35
• ......
• the packets present in the Queue 0 will be transmitted with a rate 1/35.
7.4 ETHERNET FRAME FRAGMENTATION
QoS preserve High priority traffic, by giving it precedence during traffic congestions. However, in case of
real time traffic also latency and jitter are important factors. Latency is strictly related to the line speed
and usually can be managed by designing the network topology in a proper way (e.g. by limiting the max-
imum number of hops in link chains). Jitter is instead a more sensitive parameter because it depends on
the traffic conditions.
In fact, when a High priority packet has to be sent over the radio link it is scheduled on a High Priority
queue. However, before to be sent over the radio link it has to wait that the packet currently in transmis-
sion (even a Best Effort packet) will be entirely sent. This waiting time can considerably change depending
on the best effort packet size (from 64bytes to 1518 bytes of even more in case of jumbo frames). One
technique used to mitigate this phenomenon is packet fragmentation, i.e. longer frames are subdivided in
smaller fragments at Tx side. A label is added to the packet in order to number these subframes. At Rx
side the original frame is rebuilt after all the fragments are received. In this way, the maximum waiting
time for a High Priority packet is reduced to the sub-frame size (some hundreds of bytes), providing sen-
sitive benefits to the packet jitter.
The SIAE switch allows to fragment Ethernet frames with two options: 256 or 512 Bytes.
For example: in case the radio is serving a 1024Byte frame in the lowest (queue 0) and there is an incoming
frame (256 bytes) in the highest priority queue (queue 7). The packet in the highest priority should be
served first, but since the servant is busy processing the packet in the lower queues, the 256Byte frame
has to wait until the radio has processed the 1024 Byte frame, see Fig.20.
70 MN.00273.E - 006
Fig.20 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled
With the fragmentation enabled the time that the packet in higher queues have to wait is smaller. With
fragmentation enabled the radio divides the 1024 byte packet into 4 packets of 256 Bytes and the servant
can transmit the first frame of 256 Byte in the lower queue and then transmit the high priority traffic, re-
ducing the jitter in the network, see Fig.21.
Fig.21 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled
7.5 PACKET COMPRESSION
The SIAE switch provides header packet compression. This feature allows to compress the packet header
by transmitting over the radio link proprietary labels in place of long and repetitive header field.
Multi-layer Packet Compression supports the following protocols: Ethernet, MPLS, IPv4/IPv6, UDP and RTP
and LTE S1 interface tunnelling. This latter cover the case of LTE eNodeB backhauling on S1 interface,
where the eUE traffic (either IPv4 or IPv6) is enveloped into a GTP-U tunnel. The Header compressed in
this case includes (IPv4+UDP+GTP-U of the S1 interface)+(IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP of the eUE traffic inserted
into the tunnel).
MN.00273.E - 006 71
When enabled, the user can select which header have to be compressed considering the following maxi-
mum limits:
• the total header field size cannot exceed 124 bytes
• the total header field size after internal coding cannot exceed 118 bytes. the internal coding is re-
quired by SIAE switch in order to perform the compression task.
In Fig.22 are detailed the different header fields that can be selected with their weight in terms of header
field size and header field size after internal coding.
Header field
Header
size after
field size
internal coding
(Bytes)
(Bytes)
! Ethernet +14 +12.5
! C-TAG (802.1Q) +4 +2
! Q-in-Q (802.1ad) - -
+(4*n) +(2*n)
Max number of S-TAG (from 1 to 2) (default=1)
! MPLS - -
+(4*n) +(4*n)
Max number of MPLS labels (from 1 to 3), PW included (default=1)
! Control Word (RFC4385) +4 +3.5
! IP+ - -
IPv4 only (default) +20 +19.5
IPv4 or IPv6 +40 +39.5
+8 +8
! UDP
! RTP
+12 +12
+100 +99
Tunneling OPv4 - IPv4/IPv6(IPv4+UDP+GTP-U+IPv4/IPv6+UDP+RTP)
Fig.22 - Header compression
72 MN.00273.E - 006
7.6 ETHERNET OAM (OPERATION ADMINISTRATION AND MAINTE-
NANCE)
This protocol can be used in any point-to-point Ethernet link. The aim of this protocol is to check and mon-
itor the functionality of the service that the provider guarantees on the network.
7.6.1 Service layer OAM
The Service Layer OAM fully monitors a customer End-to-End Ethernet Service. Two main standards cover
this topic, the IEEE 802.1ag and ITU-T Y.1731.
The IEEE 802.1ag provides CFM (Connectivity Fault Management) useful for detecting, isolating and re-
porting connectivity faults. The ITU-T Y.1731 Standard comprehends the CFM plus some additional fea-
tures, like RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) that allows to report back to the start of the chain the Alarm
message.
SIAE equipment support CFM according to both standards ITU-T Y.1731 and 802.1ag.
The IEEE 802.1ag and the ITU-T Y.1731 are End-to-End service, i.e. provide the tools to monitor the Ether-
net Service regardless of the layers, Network Path and operators. Since the spectrum of application can
include many applications a more hierarchical structure is needed.
The Standards define:
• Maintenance Domains (MD): these specify the Domains of operators, users and service providers.
Levels from 0 to 7 are possible depending on the type of service to be monitored. Customer Domain
is the higher which includes both ends of the Ethernet service (from one End user to the other End
user), Standard Default values for Customer Domain are 7, 6 and 5. Service Provider Domains
should have a MD lower than the Customer Domain since include the whole network except the End
Users. Standard default values for Provider Domains are 3 and 4. Operator Domains are lower than
Service Provider Domains since just a part of the network is included. Standard Default values for
operator domains are 0, 1 and 2. Here follows a picture explaining the hierarchical structure of Main-
tenance Domains.
• ALFOplus: in SIAE equipment one Maintenance Domain can be specified. At each end of the Main-
tenance Domain two MEPs (Maintenance End Point) will be specified. The MEPs are “markers” that
define the end of a domain and are in charge of originating OAM frames. In a domain also MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points) can be specified. The MIPs are passive check-points. The MEPs
and MIPs configuration are discussed in details in the following points. The choice of the domain and
the Domain Label (name) is left to the user. Particular attenuation must be paid to use the same
MD label in each equipment where the MD is specified, i.e. different equipment with same value of
MD domain but different MD labels belongs to different Domains.
MN.00273.E - 006 73
CE PE PE CE
Access Operator 1 Operator 2 Access
Network Core Network Core Network Network
High Level
Customer MEP MEP
Service MEP MEP

Provider
MEP MIP MIP MEP

Operator 1
Low Level
MEP MIP MIP MEP
Operator 2
Fig.23 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains
• A Maintenance Association (MA) is one association which correlates the VLAN to the MD in which
the MEPs and MIPs have to be defined.
• ALFOplus: when a specified traffic needs to be monitored, then it is necessary to relay the VLAN to
a Domain and to the corresponding MEPs or MIPs through the MA. Before creating the Maintenance
Association, the VLAN, either S-VLAN or C-VLAN, has to be specified in the VLAN Table. In each
SIAE equipment it is possible to set up to 32 different MA. Particular attention must be paid to use
the same MA label in each equipment where the MA is specified, i.e. different MA labels on the same
VLAN correspond to different MA associations.
• At the Edge of a MD there are MEPs (Maintenance End Points) and in the middle there could be MIPs
(Maintenance Intermediate Points). MEPs are the units in charge of managing the CFM to correctly
monitor the status of the Ethernet service provided. MIPs are passive check-points that answer to
pollings coming from MEPs. MEPs will forward OAM messages coming from higher domains and will
discard OAM messages generated from lower domains.
• ALFOplus: Each interface can be configured as MEP, Port A interface (radio interface) included. Once
chosen the interface, depending on the network topology, the direction of the MEP has to be spec-
74 MN.00273.E - 006
ified. Two Directions are possible, MEP “ ” and MEP “ ”. With MEP “ ” configured the OAM
PDUs are sent from the interface in the direction outside the equipment, i.e. the OAM PDUs are sent
from the interface on the cable toward next equipment. With MEP “ ” configured the OAM PDUs
are sent from the interface toward the inside of the equipment and will follow the VLAN table pre-
viously configured. MEPs are distinguished from each other through a MEP ID, therefore MEPs be-
longing to same MA must have different MEP IDs. In order to configure a MIP the MA has to be
habilitated on the equipment. Up to 32 MIPs or MEPs can be configured on each equipment.
The protocols belonging to the Connectivity Fault Management implemented in SIAE equipment are listed
hereafter:
• Continuity Check Protocol: this protocol enables the sending of a periodic message (like a Heartbeat
message) which enables the other MEPs deployed in the network to distinguish the status of a vir-
tual connection. this message can only be originated by a MEP.
ALFOplus: is adjustable with 1s, 10s, 1min, 10min. These messages do not trigger any automatic
reply from the destination entity.
• LoopBack Protocol: it resembles an IP PING message; once this message is sent (e.g. MEP1 sends
a Loopback Message to MEP2). MEP2 replies to MEP1 confirming therefore the status of the connec-
tion. This is done to check the status of the connection between the MEP originating the message
and the MEP/MIP to which the message is addressed. This message can only be originated from one
MEP and can be addressed to both MEPs or MIPs.
ALFOplus: the number of Loopback Messages in SIAE equipment is adjustable from 1 to 5 consec-
utive Loopbacks. In each equipment, it is possible for each MEP to check the presence of other MEPs
in the same MA. This is done through the “Remote MEP” application which allows this acknowledge-
ment and distinguishes the other MEP through means of MEP IDs and MAC address.
• Link Trace Protocol: this protocol sends a message similar to the LoopBack protocol. Every equip-
ment that is reached by this message will answer to the sender providing its own MAC address. In
this way the sender is able to understand of which equipment the MA is composed. E.g. a MEP sends
the Link Trace Message to another MEP belonging to the same Maintenance Association. the MIPs
that are deployed in the middle of the path will forward this message and answer to the initiating
MEP with their own MAC Address. By doing so the initiating MEP knows the OAM-devices deployed
in the path and their order.
• Remote Defect Indicator: this feature allows a MEP, in presence of a fault or a defect, to send a RDI
to inform the other MEPs, belonging to the same MA, of the presence of this Defect. The advantages
of this procedure are to avoid multiple Alarms created by the same cause and to be able to check
the status of other Remote MEPs. This RDI information is reported in the Continuity Check Message.
ALFOplus: this feature is present in SIAE equipment and the presence of this alarm can be checked
as well in the Remote MEPs screen on the equipment.
7.7 ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MONITORING - RMON
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
SIAE equipment support RMONv1, first MIB, as defined in RFC2819. This MIB contains real-time LAN sta-
tistics e.g. utilization, collisions and CRC errors. These counters are managed locally into the radio equip-
ment and are defined independently for each port of the device (both LAN and Radio interfaces). SIAE
NMS systems collect periodically this data and store it into the network database. More in details, the RMON
implementation in SIAE Network Elements is classified into two groups:
• RMON – Statistics: These are the counters data collected in real time by the Network Equipment.
These data are stored in the network equipment itself and, the NMS Statistics viewer can visualize
this data with the “Refresh” button.
• RMON - History: This is managed by the NMS through the collection of the counters data from the
Network Equipment. After a periodical polling to the Network Element, the NMS collects all the data
and these data are seen as the RMON History.
MN.00273.E - 006 75
In other words, the “RMON Statistics” are the data that are collected and stored in the Network Equipment,
while the “RMON History” is an aggregation of the data collected from each network equipment and the
database is located in the NMS.
7.8 RMON COUNTERS
RMON statistics are composed by counters for each port of the device that are stored in the equipment
deployed on field.
Into the equipment it can be chosen to store the values with a sampling period that can be defined between
two values: 1 min, 15 min, or both. For each sampling period the counters values are stored into the equip-
ment. After a predefined period (polling period), all the RMON data stored by the equipment are get by the
NMS. The polling period can be either less than 4 hours (if the sampling period is 1 min) or 1 day (in case
the sampling period is 15 min). The NMS aggregates the files received to create a bigger database with
the History of the Performance Monitoring samples.
Here below are described the RMON counters available for each device interface (both LAN and radio
ports):
• DropEvents: Total number of events (frames, or whole queue contents) in which packets were
dropped by the interface due to lack of resources.
• Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.
• Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.
• BroadcastPkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast ad-
dress.
• Multicast Pkts RX: Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
• CRC Align Errors: Total number of packets received that had a length between 64 and the Max Pack-
et Size configured on the equipment switch (in any case not exceeding 10240 bytes) with bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-inte-
gral number of octets (Alignment Error).
• Undersize Pkts: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were oth-
erwise well formed.
• Oversize Pkts: The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than
maximum allowable length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise
well formed.
• Fragments: Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with
a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
• Jabbers: Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size, it
can be set to 1522, 2048 bytes or 10240 Kbytes) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Se-
quence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment Error).
• Collisions: The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.
• Utilization Rx: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface dur-
ing this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/
s port speed. So, it represents the mean RX throughput measured on the port during the sampling
period and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.
• Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.
• Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.
• BroadcastPkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to the broadcast
address.
• Multicast Pkts TX: Total number of good packets transmitted that were directed to a multicast ad-
dress.
76 MN.00273.E - 006
• Utilization TX: The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface dur-
ing this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. The percentage is always referred to a 1Gbit/
s port speed. So, it represents the mean TX throughput measured on the port during the sampling
period and it is expressed as a percentage of a port speed.
All the counters described above are part of the RMON statistics and it is not possible to collect only a sub-
set of them. It is however possible to select on which equipment interface activate the RMON statistics (for
example, they can be enabled only on the radio interface). This allows reducing the total amount of PM
data, for example avoiding data collection from unused LAN interfaces. This can be done on all Payload
Interfaces (regardless if electrical or optical), the Radio interfaces are included as well.
7.9 ADVANCED STATISTIC MONITORING FOR SERVICES AND PRI-

ORITY COUNTERS
In addition to the Ethernet Counters per Port with SIAE equipment it is possible to set on the Radio interface
the RMON counters per Service (Vlan) or Priority (Queues). Differently from the previous RMON counters,
the Service and Priority counters can be activated for the following variables.
• Octets TX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted.
• Pkts TX: Total number of packets transmitted.

• Octets RX: Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received by the interface.
• Pkts RX: Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)
received.
• DropEvents: Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the interface due
to lack of resources.
The Service and Priority RMON can be activated and collected from NMS (Network Management System).
The Service and Priority RMON are based on the Advanced Ethernet Counters present on the equipment
and configurable on site. This means that on site it is possible to activate the Advanced Ethernet Counters
but not the Service and Priority RMON.
In any case the NMS has higher priority in respect to the configuration inserted through Web LCT. This
means that the local operator can enable and read the active measure, but when the configuration of these
RMON is done through NMS, the local operator can only read the values of the Advanced Ethernet Counters.
It is not possible to enable the RMON for Priority and, in the same equipment, the RMON per Vlan.
7.9.1 Priority RMON
The Priority RMON are based on the internal Queue of the equipment, not on the value of the Priority; this
implies that:
• the maximum number of RMON (Priority) that can be enabled are limited to 8, i.e. the number of
the queues available in SIAE switch.
• if traffic with different priorities are listed in the same Queue, the Priority RMON will work with one
Probe on the Queue. I.e. the traffic in the same Queue is seen as “Same Priority Traffic” and the
Priority RMON counts the frames belonging to the Queue
In other words, with Priority RMON there is a probe for each queue (8 queues in SIAE switch). Each probe
counts the variables listed above (Octets TX, Pkts TX, Octets RX, Pkts RX and DropEvents).
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.
MN.00273.E - 006 77
7.9.2 Service RMON
The Service RMON counters allow the equipment to track the variables listed above depending on the Ser-
vice (Vlan Tag). This type of RMON can be set only on the Radio interface.
Each equipment can be set to collect RMON up to 32 Services (Vlan Tag) and only on Customer Tag.
These counters will be available only with the Minimum Polling Policy of 15 min.
7.10 SYNCHRONISM
Network Synchronisation is a growing subject related to the network evolution from TDM to Ethernet pay-
load.
In this chapter it will be described the different features supported by SIAE switch equipment for the syn-
chronization transport. The decision of the correct source to enable and how to pass the synchronisation
signal to customer’s equipment depends on network situation which has to be evaluated case by case.
Sync
Sync
2G BTS Sync
Sync Sync
ETH
ETH Reference
ALFOplus ALFOplus Ethernet/TDM
Network Clock
ETH
3G NodeB
Sync
Full IP
ETH
Fig.24 - NodeB and BTS synch
The main concept is to transfer the synchronization signal throughout the network deployed. This implies
that SIAE equipment will take the clock signal from the concentration points (POC) and transfer it towards
the tail sites and distribute the synchronization signal to the external equipment such as NodeBs and BTS
(see Fig.24).
ALFOplus
Input SETS Output
CK IN CK OUT
Fig.25 - SETS circuit
Going into details, this means that each SIAE equipment (represented in Fig.25) will have, at least, one
“Input” and one “Output” CK.
Input (CK IN) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment get the Clock signal from, these could be
another SIAE equipment or external equipment.
Output (CK OUT) is/are the interface/s where the SIAE equipment provides the Clock Signal to, these could
be another SIAE equipment or external equipment.
78 MN.00273.E - 006
Internally to each SIAE equipment the SETS identify the input and output types of interfaces by the fol-
lowing codes:
• TE: This code represents an Ethernet interface (LAN) used as input CK
• T0: Output interface. This code represents the Internal Clock
The purpose of the above list is to list the different acronyms used by the SETS that may be present in the
configuration screens.
There are some features to be used for maintenance or refined tuning of the clock propagation.
Fig.26 - Synchronisation menu
Here below are listed the different configurations to be made:
• Status Control: this is a forced status for maintenance purposes of the SETS. It can be forced in:
- “Free Running”: Independently from the synchronization signal received, the clock is locked onto
the internal clock.
- “Hold Over”: The SETS is locked into the internal clock which tries to preserve the frequency
received when the SETS was locked.
- “Locked”: in this case the SETS is locked to a source of synchronization.
• “Time” Settings: these are general setting for the synchronization
- “Hold Off Time”: Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequen-
cy of a synchronism source become invalid (not present or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and the first input source having a valid signal will
be used.
- “WTR Time”: i.e. Wait-To-Restore, this is a wait time to avoid oscillations. Time (expressed in
minutes) that has to pass before allowing the selected valid input source to be actually used
within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
• “LTI Set Time” and “LTI Reset Time”: are controls that avoid oscillations of Alarms. When one alarm
raises up, it has to be active for at least the “LTI Set Time” and when it disappears it has to be off
for at least “LTI Reset Time”.
• “Enabled”: Enables the SSM in the equipment
MN.00273.E - 006 79
7.11 SOURCES OF SYNCHRONISM
SIAE equipment is able to select among different sources of synchronization. A priority has to be assigned
to enable each source, with a value ranging from 1 to 9 included. The priority 1 corresponds to the maxi-
mum value, while the priority 9 corresponds to the minimum value. The priority shall be used to select in
which order the different synch sources must be used. In case the Priority is set as “Disabled” the corre-
spondent interface is not used as a synchronization source.
Fig.27 - Sources of synchronisation
The selectable sources of synchronisation are listed below. For each source it is also listed in square brack-
ets the correspondent acronym used by the SETS:
• Radio Interface: it is possible to have 1 radio interfaces (1+0).
• GE Interface [TE]: to identify which LANs are the sources of synchronization they have to be chosen
under “TE LAN A” and “TE LAN B”. This implies that a maximum of 2 LAN interfaces can be set as
source of synchronization. In order to receive the synchronization signal (and regardless of the SSM
status) the GE interface has to be set as “Slave”. The configuration choices and other details are
explained in “SSM on Ethernet Interfaces”.
• Internal Clock [T0]: with the Synchronization not enabled the equipment is locked into its internal
clock
In case SSM is not enabled, the equipment switches from one source of synchronization to another follow-
ing the priority scale, starting from the source set to priority 1 and scaling to the sources with higher values
of priority (i.e. lower priority level). The synch source switch occurs when the present source suffers one
of the following events:
• The source of synchronization is not physically available
• The clock deviation is bigger than 4.6 ppm (maximum deviation that the internal clock can follow).
In other words, if the LAN1 is selected as first source (priority 1) of synchronization, and the LAN2 is se-
lected as the second source (priority 2) of synchronization, the SIAE equipment will be synchronized on
the LAN1 until the cable will be physically unplugged or the LAN1 frequency and phase will be out of their
specified ranges. Once one of these events occurs, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchro-
nization to the second source listed. If the second source listed is unplugged or out of maximum range then
the SIAE equipment will switch to the third source and so on.
In case no other synch sources are available the SIAE equipment will go on “Internal Source”, i.e. the in-
ternal clock present in SIAE equipment. In this condition the internal clock will be kept in hold status, trying
to keep the last synchronization reference received. In these conditions, the internal clock of SIAE equip-
ment has a reliability of 0.3 ppm over 24 h. When the SIAE equipment switches to internal clock, it prop-
agates a quality of SEC – SDH Equipment Clock.
80 MN.00273.E - 006
7.12 MCM PROTOCOL (MICROWAVE CAPACITY MANAGEMENT)
Microwave radio transmission capacity depends on radio channel propagation conditions. In case of Ether-
net ring, capacity degradation can affect one side of the ring, while the other is still working at nominal
capacity. In case of congestion events, Microwave radio prioritizes the Ethernet traffic, by reducing or dis-
carding the lower priority frames. Similar situation can be found even in other network topologies, where
the microwave link bandwidth changes must be reported to an upstream Ethernet switch or router in order
to adjust the relevant traffic accordingly its traffic shaping and/or forwarding rules. By knowing the capac-
ity of the radio link, external equipment can optimize the transport on ring networks, by means of forward-
ing rules that choose the best direction for each traffic type, or select additional criteria for the quality
management (e.g. Router/Switch shapes the traffic allowing only selected data to be transmitted through
the microwave link).
The Microwave Capacity Management (i.e. MCM) protocol has been developed by SIAE and CISCO in order
to improve the behaviour of the Ethernet ring protection when using the adaptive code and modulation
(ACM) on microwave links. Thus the MCM offers reliable QoS and optimized performances even in worst
radio propagation conditions because it allows forwarding traffic on the Ethernet ring according to the
bandwidth available for every ring branch.
For a more comprehensive scenario, the following Ethernet ring topology is assumed, where adaptive mod-
ulation microwave Radio and Ethernet switch or router are deployed.
Cell site A
SIAE Cisco SIAE

radio ASR radio
SIAE SIAE
radio radio
SIAE SIAE
Cell site B Core network
radio radio
SIAE SIAE
radio radio
SIAE Cisco SIAE

radio ASR radio
Cell site C
Ge Interface Radio link
Fig.28 -
The main ring topology advantages are:

• to offer a protection path in case of equipment failure or radio link unavailability due to deep fading
• to increase Ethernet throughput (up to double) from the core towards the border of the network by
distributing on the two ring branches the Ethernet traffic by means of control plane protocols (i.e.:
G.8032) in order to open the Ethernet loop in a suitable segment.
The standard ring protection mechanisms are usually triggered by failures, because the control protocols
stop receiving messages due to loss of connectivity among sites.
However, the traditional Ethernet ring protection mechanisms do not take into account of the degradation
of radio links capacity due to ACM intervention, because the protection protocol packets (usually marked
as high priority) still continue to run on the ring, and this leads to an unbalanced operation of the ring with
different capacities on the two branches.
In fact, the traditional Ethernet ring protection are not sensitive to variations on the radio bandwidth oc-
curring in presence of modulation level reduction (i.e. ACM enabled) caused by atmospheric phenomena
(e.g. fading due to multipath and rain events). Therefore, in case of fading phenomena, the Ethernet ring
protocol does not activate the ring protection because of lack of both Link Loss Forwarding messages com-
MN.00273.E - 006 81
ing from SIAE equipment and Hello-Packets’s loss (i.e. the high priority traffic is still transported while the
Best Effort traffic is cut). For this reason, the ACM functioning in presence of Ethernet ring protection could
generate disruptions into services because of the small amount of capacity passing across radio links af-
fected by propagation phenomena.
A key point to consider is the duration of an event that can result in a change of modulation: it ranges from
few minutes to tens of minutes. The effect of a single event lasting from milliseconds to few seconds (mul-
tipath phenomena) is already operated by the QoS management of the Microwave radio, in order to not
lose the priority traffic, while the slower phenomena must be handled by traffic re-routing.
The following therefore applies only to the phenomena longer than tens of seconds. In detail, consider the
following scenario:
Cell site A
SIAE Cisco SIAE

radio ASR radio
SIAE Normal path SIAE

radio radio
SIAE SIAE
Cell site B Core network
radio radio
SIAE SIAE
radio Degraded path radio
1
SIAE Cisco SIAE

radio ASR radio
Cell site C
Ge Interface Radio link
Fig.29
In the network scenario shown above:
• in each site it has been connected a CISCO router to SIAE radio through LAN ports
• each microwave link is supposed to work with the ACM enabled: it’s worth to notice that the ACM
feature could be useful to optimise the antenna’s dimensioning by distinguishing between “High Pri-
ority Services” (i.e. the traffic to be guaranteed with an availability required by the customer) and
the “Best Effort Services” (i.e. the traffic to be discarded by the equipment in case of bad propaga-
tion conditions. The capacity reserved for these services depends on the maximum modulation
achievable by the equipment)
Basing on the above network scenario, on one branch, the cell sites A and B aren’t affected by atmospheric
phenomena and the mobile network operates at full services (from highest to lowest priority services). On
the other branch, for a given time interval, the radio link between the core network and the cell site C is
affected by heavy rain, resulting in capacity degradation. Since there is no balancing in the ring of traffic
priorities between branches, only the “surviving” mobile services are available in the affected branch.
The solution to this behaviour is the MW Capacity Management (MCM) feature developed by SIAE and Cis-
co, which allows for traffic forwarding on the Ethernet ring in accordance with the available bandwidth for
each priority in the two ring branches. In other words, using dynamic traffic engineering, you can optimize
the allocation of class of services in the whole ring. The feature is based on a protocol by which:
• the Microwave radio notifies the changes in link capacity to the Ethernet switch or router that it is
connected to, which in turn applies the relevant forwarding rules
• the notifications take place by means of OAM (Ethernet-Operations, Administration and Mainte-
nance) type messages which signal the changes in the band availability (BW-VSM messages)
• through the management (transmission and reception) of these messages and the proper configu-
ration of the forwarding rules, the ring will be able to change the traffic profile to take the degraded
path in consideration.
82 MN.00273.E - 006
MW Capacity Management (MCM) protocol description
The general approach to solve this problem will be through the use of a special “Ethernet Operations,
Administration and Maintenance” (E-OAM) message, which will be able to report changes in band-
width availability. Through a combination of the generation and reception of this message and the appro-
priate configuration of forwarding rules on the Cisco MWR, the ring will be able to modify the traffic profile
to take account of the degraded path.
An ITU-T Y.1731 Vendor Specific Message (VSM) is used for the purpose of reporting the currently
available bandwidth (BW) information from the Microwave radio to the Cisco MWR. This message will be
referred to thereafter as the BW-VSM.
The default settings for the protocol are the followings:
• the BW-VSM is sent untagged. However, the equipment optionally supports that the BW-VSM could
be transmitted with a configurable valid IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag
• the BW-VSM is associated with Maintenance Level 0. However, the equipment optionally allows the
network operator to associate the message with a valid Maintenance Level in the range 0 to 7 as
per the ITU-T Y.1731 / IEEE 802.1ag-2007 standards.
Procedures on Transmitter (SIAE Microwave radio)
At steady state, and while there is no fading on the microwave link, BW-VSM messages must not be gen-
erated. Only when the radio transceiver detects degradation or subsequent improvement in the microwave
link quality and changes its modulation scheme, it must advertise the change using the BW-VSM defined
in the section above. The radio transceivers should handle on their own any fading event that lasts less
than N seconds (N= 10 or greater, may be configurable). Such short-lived events should not be reported
using BW-VSM. When the fading exceeds the N seconds threshold, the equipment must immediately gen-
erate a VSM with:
• Nominal Tx BW: set to the nominal link Tx BW, when there’s no fading
• Current Tx BW: set to the current link Tx BW
Subsequent messages must be sent periodically at the set transmission period, for the duration of the fad-
ing event. In those periodic messages, the Current Tx BW field must be set to reflect the most up to date
status of the link. This includes both the case where the link condition is deteriorating (i.e. decreasing BW)
as well as the case where it is improving (i.e. increasing BW).
When the fading subsides, the equipment must send a final BW-VSM with the Current Tx BW field set to
the nominal value. This will signal the end of the fading event.
Microwave Radio re-provisioning, equipments or cards replacement, cable re-connection must trigger a
BW-VSM message transmission, with the Current Tx BW field set to the nominal value, to re-align the sys-
tems.
Procedures on Receiver (CISCO Ethernet switch or router)
The solution enables ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection mechanisms to be triggered in response to
degradation in BW on the microwave link, i.e. Signal Degrade (SD) condition. The switch will be con-
figured a priori with the bandwidth threshold at which every Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) in-
stance on the ring is to be rerouted in case of a degraded link.
As part of the network capacity planning, the operator should:
• analyze the allocation of VLANs to ERP (G.8032) instances according to the bandwidth profile
of the EVCs associated with those VLANs
• determine the failover thresholds based on the aggregate BW of the ERP instances in re-
lation to the microwave link budget at the various capacity levels associated with the adaptive mod-
ulation schemes
When a Maintenance Endpoint (MEP) on a Cisco MWR receives the first BW-VSM message reporting
degradation, it waits for a Hold-Time of N seconds before detecting the Signal Degrade (SD) defect condi-
tion where N will be configurable in 1 sec increments from 0 to 600 seconds. The purpose of this is to in-
troduce a dampening effect and ensure network stability in the case of link instability.
MN.00273.E - 006 83
After the Hold-Time expires, the MEP detects the SD defect condition and the Cisco MWR will perform the
following actions:
• Issue a Syslog message that displays the Nominal Tx BW as well as the Current Tx BW.
• Evaluate, based on the degradation in BW, which ERP instances need to be failed over and trigger
the failover for these instances.
For the duration of the fading event, any subsequent VSM messages received will trigger the following ac-
tions:
• If the reported Current Tx BW is different from the value previously received, issue a Syslog mes-
sage that displays the Nominal Tx BW as well as the Current Tx BW.
• If the reported Current Tx BW is the same as the one previously received, then no further action is
taken.
• If the reported Current Tx BW is less than the one previously received, evaluate which additional
ERP instances need to be failed over, and trigger failover for these instances.
• If the reported Current Tx BW is more than the one previously received, then no further action is
taken
When the fading subsides and the MEP receives a BW-VSM indicating that the Current Tx BW is equal to
the Nominal Tx BW, the switch then starts a Fading Wait-to-Restore timer M. M will be configurable in 1
sec increments from 0 to 600 seconds. If the timer expires before receiving any further BW-VSMs, then
the MEP clears the SD defect condition associated with the ERP instances.
In case the BW-VSM announcing the return to nominal BW is lost, the MEP will detect that it has stopped
receiving periodic BW-VSM frames. In this case, the MEP waits for 3.5 times the BW-VSM transmission in-
terval, and then starts the Fading Wait-to-Restore timer. When the timer expires, the MEP clears the SD
defect condition.
Equipment setup parameters
In order to modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM), the following parame-
ters have to be set (refer to the image below):
• Enable/disable the management of the BW-VSM messages at level of single LAN port
• Define the parameters for the forwarding of the BW-VSM messages:

- the Tag 802.1Q VLAN value in the TX VLan ID box (value between 2 and 4094). By default, the
BW-VSM message is sent untagged (value 0)
- Maintenance Level of the OAM domain in the TX OAM Maint. Level box (value between 0 and 7).
The Default value is 0. This setting involves even the change of the destination MAC address of
the BW-VSMmessage because this address corresponds to the CCM multicast address for the
associated OAM maintenance level (the CCM multicast address depends on the CISCO equip-
ment configuration)
- in the Fading Hold Off (s) box, set the waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and
starting the transmission of BW-VSM messages (value between 10 and 60). The lesser is this
value, the faster will be the reaction of the device after a fading phenomena. However, small
values of the Fading Hold Off parameters can cause instability in the device in presence of fast
phenomena. The default waiting period is 10 seconds
- in the TX Period box, set the transmission period (in seconds) between one BW-VSM message
and the next one (1, 10 or 60 seconds). The default waiting period is 10 seconds. The same
value has to be set into CISCO equipment as well
- in the BW Tx Type box, set the criterion used to calculate the band value available within every
transmission period (Tx Period):
- Average: The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the available
band within the observation period
- Min: The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the minimum value of the available
- Max: The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the maximum value of the available
84 MN.00273.E - 006
Fig.30 - Microwave capacity management
7.13 FADE MARGIN MEASURE
In ALFOplus is available the Fade Margin Measure. The Fade Margin is the difference between the Received
Power and the Threshold at a given BER. Once the link is planned, in the Link Budget is present a Fade
Margin that has been calculated through mathematical formulas. The Fade Margin depends from the prop-
agation’s parameters and from the presence of interferers.
This feature is useful to compare the Fade Margin provided from the Link Budget calculation with the real
Fade Margin present on field. Especially in case of interferers that have not been considered during the
planning of the MW link.
In order to execute the Fade Margin measure it necessary to have:
• Theoretical Fade Margin from Link Budget calculations
• Local and Remote IP Addresses.
Fig.31
MN.00273.E - 006 85
The maximum range of Fade Margin for ALFOplus is 30 dB. For extra attenuation is required an external
attenuator.
In case the link budget presents a value of Fade Margin to be measured higher than the actual range it is
necessary to apply an “External Attenuator” and insert the correspondent attenuation on input data menu.
The Fade Margin Calculation is traffic affecting.
Warning: Fade margin measure works by disabling ACM engine on local and remote equipment.
7.14 PROVIDE SYNCHRONISM TO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Once the SIAE equipment is synchronized, the clock signal has to be passed toward external equipment or
other SIAE equipment. SIAE equipment can give the synchronization signal through different interfaces.
Fig.32 - Provide synchronism
The interfaces that are available to provide synchronization to other SIAE or external equipment are:
• Radio: this interface is passing the synchronism automatically to the remote equipment. No config-
uration is needed.
• GE Interfaces: the TX CK of the all GE lines (i.e. LAN 1 and 2) is locked to the SETS. In this way,
the CK can be passed through these connections to other equipment provided that they support
Synchronous Ethernet. The GE Interfaces when used in Electrical can provide the CK signal to other
equipment: in this case the equipment port role must be “Master”. Once the synchronization is en-
abled in the SIAE equipment, automatically all the LAN interfaces are locked onto the SETS. This
implies that the synchronization signal is automatically provided onto all the LAN interfaces.
The choices of the interface to pass the clock signal depend strictly on the external equipment. This means
that in first place it is necessary to establish the possible sources of synchronization available on the ex-
ternal equipment. Depending on the availability of these sources, SIAE equipment will be configured with
the correspondent interface to pass the clock signal.
86 MN.00273.E - 006
7.15 G.8264 SSM – SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE
The SSM is a protocol that transmits the quality of the synchronization message throughout the network
(G.781).
In the synchronization network the transmission of the quality of the clock allows the network to be scal-
able and to provide redundancy. In case of failure of SIAE equipment or cable, it is helpful to provide re-
dundancy for clock propagation in order to avoid synchronization loops.
Synchronisation loops could happen after a failure when two equipment are synchronising each other on
the same physical connection. If this happens the equipment will not present any alarm on the synchroni-
zation but will generate and propagate a not reliable clock. The quality of the clocks that are propagated
are:
• PRC: Primary reference Clock – Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)
• SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)
• SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local

• SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)
• DNU: Do not Use – This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock
Here above are listed in order from the better quality clock (PRC – Primary Reference Clock) to the worse
quality clock (DNU – Do Not Use). The better the quality is the more time can the SIAE equipment stay in
holdover (Internal Clock) without a degradation of the payload. In other words, better is the quality, longer
can remain reliable the clock in holdover cases.
The DNU quality is always propagated on the source on which the equipment is locked for synchronization.
In this way the Loops of synchronization are easily avoided.
Unless the user forces the CK quality input/output, SIAE equipment reads the quality present in the input
interfaces. This means that, unless there is some user’s modifications, SIAE equipment propagates the
quality of the clock as it is. I.e. the output quality is the same as the input quality.
E.g.: If in the input interface (POC Site) there is a quality of SSUT of the CK signal, SIAE equipment will
pass throughout the network this synchronization signal with a quality message of SSUT.
In case the SIAE equipment is in Holdover (internal clock) it changes the quality of the synchronization to
“SEC” quality. With SSM enabled, SIAE equipment will choose the sources of the synchronization based on
the better quality received.
In general, the equipment selects the synch source with the following criteria:
• it chooses the sources with the highest quality

• if more than one source have the same quality, the one with the highest priority is selected (i.e. the
ones that have the smaller priority value, from 1 up to 9)
• in any case, if a DNU quality is received on the highest priority source, this latter is discarded and
the equipment selects an alternative source.
Example 1: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same priority:
a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)
b. Radio with quality SSUT (Priority 1)

In case the sources have the same priority, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchroniza-
tion to the best quality, in this case (b) the Radio with SSUT quality.
Example 2: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the different qual-
ity and different priority:
a. LAN1 with quality SEC (Priority 1)

In case the sources have different priority and quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of
synchronization with higher quality, in this case (b) the Radio with Priority 2 and quality SSUT. Howev-
er, if a DNU quality would be received on Radio, the SIAE equipment will switch the synch source to
LAN1 interface.
Example 3: if one SIAE equipment has the two following sources of synchronization, with the same quality:
a. LAN1 with quality SSUT (Priority 1)
MN.00273.E - 006 87
In case the sources have equal quality, the SIAE equipment will switch the source of synchronization
with higher priority, in this case (a) the LAN1 with Priority 1 and quality SSUT. However, if a DNU quality
would be received on LAN1, the SIAE equipment will switch the synch source to Radio port.
The quality of the synchronism has to be enabled for each SIAE equipment and can be transported on the
following interfaces:
• On the Ethernet Interfaces through a standard protocol (according to ITU-T G.8264)
• Radio interface with Local/Remote Telemetry: Depending on the MW link configuration (1+0) the
SSM messages are passed to the remote SIAE equipment in different ways.
- 1+0 Configuration: In this case there is one Local/Remote Telemetry passing the SSM messages
Within this configuration table there are also some maintenance configurations such as:
• Forced Switch: this command allows the operator to force the SETS to lock to a predetermined
source. This command is above all other configurations. This means that the SETS will be locked
onto this source even if the cable is unplugged
• Preferential switch: In case two sources have equal priority it is possible to set a Preferential Source.
In any case the quality is the main parameter of choice, then when two sources have the same pri-
ority, the preferential source is chosen.
In relation to the SSM, it is possible to:
• Visualize the quality of the clock signal received and transmitted (Rx Quality and Tx Quality)
• Overwrite the Quality received or transmitted (Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Quality) and the choices
are:
- PRC: Primary reference Clock – Best quality clock reachable (Cesium Clock)
- SSUT: Synchronization Supply Unit Transit (Rubidium Clock)

- SSUL: Synchronization Supply Unit Local
- SEC: SDH Equipment Clock (Crystal Clock)
- DNU: Do not Use – This signal informs the receiver to do not use this clock
The Overwrite of the Quality of the Clock is configurable by the user and simply forces in input or output
the quality.
7.15.1 SSM on Ethernet Interfaces
In order to propagate the clock signal through the Ethernet 1GE Electrical interface it is necessary to set
correctly the master and slave option for each interface. It is possible to assign the roles (Master or Slave)
statically (as set up for source LAN) or dynamically (according to Synch direction).
This because the Master interface transmits the clock to the Slave interface and in case the direction of
propagation of the clock has to be changed (line failure, insufficient quality, etc..), the master and slave
assignment has to be re-negotiated with a consequent loss of traffic. This re-negotiation implies an inter-
ruption of the traffic from 2.4 to 2.6 seconds.
SIAE equipment allows to set the role of the interfaces to “According to synch direction” (dynamic), the
flow of the propagation of the clock signal is automatically changed depending on the transferring direction
of the CK.
If the role of the interfaces is set to “As set up for source LAN” (Static), the flow of the propagation of the
clock signal is fixed (see Fig.33).
Fig.33 - LAN synchronisation method
88 MN.00273.E - 006
The other configuration present in SIAE equipment that manage the role of the LAN interfaces (Master/
Slave) is present in the main configuration of each LAN interface. Regardless if each LAN interface is set
manually as Master/Slave or with autonegotiation, the setting of dynamic or static in the SSM configuration
is privileged. In other words if the Master/Slave are set manually in the interface configuration and in the
SSM is set “According to synch direction”, if needed, the role of the LAN changes according to synch direc-
tions.
When an electrical GE interface is in Master State (despite from the fact that it comes from a “static” or
“dynamic” setting) every synchronization signal that is coming from this interface has automatically the
quality of DNU. This does not occur for optical GE or FE interfaces (Electrical and Optical), where the “Mas-
ter” and “Slave” roles are not foreseen and so the transmitting direction for the clock can be exchanged
without any port role re-negotiation.
All the Ethernet interfaces are locked on the SETS, regardless which LAN interfaces are set as sources of
synchronization. Nevertheless the “Overwrite RX Quality” and “Overwrite TX Quality” can be applied only
on the LAN interfaces used as sources of synchronization.
MN.00273.E - 006 89
90 MN.00273.E - 006
Section 3.
INSTALLATION
8 INSTALLATION OF ALFOPLUS
8.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLA-

TION
The installation, maintenance or removal of antenna systems require qualified experienced personnel.
SIAE installation instructions have been written for such a personnel. Antenna system should be inspected
once a year by qualified personnel to verify proper installation, maintenance and condition of equipment.
SIAE disclaims any liability or responsibility for the results of improper or unsafe installation practices.
ALFOplus equipment is a full-outdoor IP Ethernet radio link system, for transport capacity up to 500 Mbit/
s, designed to establish LAN-LAN connections. For the details related to the actual used frequency band
refer to the label on the equipment.
Warning This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.
Warning Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the
frequencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.
Warning The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regula-
tion for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field and EIRP regulations.
Warning The symbol indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate col-
lection at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more
information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.
MN.00273.E - 006 91
8.2 GENERAL
The ALFOplus radio system is made up of an outdoor unit, protected by a metallic shield.
Compliance to electromagnetic compatibility is guaranteed through the following precautionary measures:
• during the design phase

- use of protection circuits against electrical dischargers
- use of filters on the power supply input circuits against noise propagating on the power supply
wires
• during the installation phase
- use of shielded cables
- use of ground connections.

The installation phases of the whole system are described in the following paraghaphs and it must be done
only by service person suitably trained.
Warning Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs, chosen for local and remote side, have
equal subband and different Tx module (H and L).
8.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING
The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.
The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.
Position and pin-out of the equipment connectors are available in this section.
8.4 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS
During the final installation, protect the ODU by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with the equip-
ment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in one’s country.
The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the auxiliary connector M12 5 pin from the
ODU or disconnecting the LAN PoE cable.
The typical magneto thermal switch has characteristics at least 48Vdc @6A with overcurrent relay class
“C” or “K” tripping curve.
Seal the M12 connector when it isn’t used, in order to avoid the removal of the cover without tools.
92 MN.00273.E - 006
8.5 GROUNDING CONNECTION
Fig.34 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.
The ODU must be connected to ground with the available grounding bolt and eyelet terminal, making ref-
erence to Fig.35.
Indoor 3 4
3 4
ODU
unit
1
Ethernet
6 2
equipment
(IDU)
(+) (-)
5
Station Local
ground ground
chassis ground
rack
Legend
1. Ethernet equipment chassis grounding point. The cross section area of the cable used must be 4
sq. mm.
2. ODU grounding M6 bolt copper faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be 16
sq. mm (V42025)
3. IDU–ODU interconnection cable.
4. Grounding cable kit (ICD00072F) copper cable type or copper alloy to connect the shield of inter-
connection cable.
5. Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length 10 m.
6. Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be 16 sq. mm
7. Surge arrester (when needed).
Fig.34 - Grounding connection
8.5.1 Mounting instructions of grounding cable kit ICD00072F (univer-

sal - no tools)
The kit IDC00072F can be used for both RG8 cable and Ethernet cable, please follow the procedure (see
Tab.22).
MN.00273.E - 006 93
Tab.22 - Mounting Instructions
Description
Remove the cable jacket by 30mm width approximate-

ly.
Take care not to damage the copper conductor. Clean
and dry the application area.
Remove the protective film from the butyle sealing

paste.
Put the contact in position on the cable, by firmly press-
ing on the cable jacket, checking the adherence of the
butyle sealing paste. The contact is firmly positioned on
the cable jacket.
Wrap the copper mesh around the contact and outer

conductor (at least 4 revolutions).
Block the mesh terminal under the contact tooth.
Cut the exceeding mesh length.
Remove the self-agglomerating tape protective film.

Carefully wrap tight the tape around contact and cable,
following the suitable mean line.
Tape adheres remaining in position and progressively
self-agglomerates.
Connect the earthing cable.
94 MN.00273.E - 006
8.6 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)
• N.2 13mm torque wrench
• N.1 15 mm torque wrench
• N.1 17 mm torque wrench

• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench.
8.7 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:
• According to antenna polarization (vertical or horizontal), assemble the antenna and support brack-
et.
Warning: These instructions are fully detailed in a separate manual “Antennas - Code: MN.00249.E”
depending on the type of used antenna.
• Installation of the ODU

• Installation onto the pole of the supporting bracket
• ODU grounding.
8.7.1 Standard coupling kit
The standard coupling kit is mounted on ALFOplus by means of four screws.
Coupling kit assembly procedure
See Fig.35 - Put the standard coupling kit on the ODU. Align the four holes of the coupling kit with the four
nut screws on the ODU. Insert and tighten the four screws.
8.8 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRAT-

ED ANTENNA
8.8.1 ODU (Standard Lock)
Mounting kit 1+0 version
• Centring ring and relevant screws
• M10 bolts
• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection
MN.00273.E - 006 95
8.8.1.1 1+0 ODU with integrated antenna
Install the antenna using the antenna installation guide (specific for each antenna) inside the antenna box
provided by antenna producer. Keep attention to the polarization of the antenna feeder depending on re-
quested polarization.
After the antenna is installed onto the pole, the ODU must be installed, see Fig.36.
• Position the three holes circular flange (1) on the antenna flange and align the three holes on the
circular flange with the three relevant holes on the antenna flange
• Insert and tighten the three 3mm M4 Allen screws (2) using a 3mm Allen wrench (torque = 2 Nm).
• To maintain disassembly performances intact for a longer period add lubricant paste, e.g.
MOLYKOTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3).
The sliding surfaces must be cleaned. The paste must then be applied with a suitable brish, rag or
grease gun. It must not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves must be worn
where repeated or prolonged contact can occur.
• Screw partially the four M10 bolts (3) on the antenna back plate: each bolt should be tightened to
have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14mm (the thickness of hook, use 15mm spanner)
• It is recommended to apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 (not supplied) to the O-ring,
protecting fingers with gloves, and insert in the proper track on the ODU flange
• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the antenna flange and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna feeder:
- vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner
- horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner
• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the antenna flange in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts
• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt
• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15mm spanner,
torque=46Nm)
• Optional: sun cover kit (AAAL00033) - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the
ODU handle by means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit
• The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the LAN cable.
Warning Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure water-
proof IPx5.
96 MN.00273.E - 006
8.9 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARAT-
ED ANTENNA
• Diameter of the pole 60-114 mm
8.9.1 ODU (Standard Lock)
Mounting kit 1+0 version
• Supporting plate, fixing bracket with M10 130mm bolts (with washer, spring and nut)
• 1 antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency, with relevant screws

• M10 25mm bolts for ODU mounting
• ODU with O-ring and devices for ground connection
8.9.1.1 1+0 ODU with separated antenna
See Fig.37.
• Position the supporting plate (1) on the pole and fix the rear bracket (2) to it by means of the four
130 mm M10 bolt (3) with relevant washers, springs and nuts (use 15mm spanner, torque =
46Nm).
• Fix the antenna side flange (4) with the proper screws (in Fig.37 the antenna flange is shown in two
different positions depending on the polarization), the screw holes side is the side where the wave-
guide must be installed.
• To maintain disassembly performances intact for a longer period add lubricant paste, e.g. MOLY-
COTE P-40, on threads of four 25mm bolts (3).
The sliding surfaces must be cleaned. The paste must then be applied with a suitable brush, rag or
grease gun. It must not be mixed with grease or oils. Chemical protective gloves must be worn
where repeated or prolonged contact can occur.
• On the supporting plate, on the opposite side respect to the antenna flange just mounted, insert in
holes (5) on the supporting plate the four 25mm M10 bolts (3): screw them partially, each bolt
should be tightened to have the square head out of the hole of about 13-14 mm (the thickness of
hook (4), use 15mm spanner).
• It is recommended to apply seal and lubricant grease Dow Corning 4 (not supplied) to the O-ring,
protecting fingers with gloves, and insert it in the proper track on the ODU flange.
• Position the ODU vertically near the four bolts on the supporting plate and align the ODU to match
the polarization of the antenna flange:
- vertical polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom left corner
- horizontal polarization: the handle of the ODU is at the bottom right corner
• After the right position has been found, rotate 30° counter clockwise the ODU and approach the
ODU to the supporting plate in order to have the four slots of the Standard Lock cross between the
four bolts
• Rotate 30° clockwise the ODU to hook each slots on the relevant bolt
• When each slot is firmly hooked on the relevant bolt, tighten each bolt (use 15 mm spanner, torque
=46 Nm)
• Optional: sun cover kit (AAAL00033) - Insert the sun cover and tie one of its bottom holes to the
ODU handle by means of the black plastic strip included in the sun cover kit
• The ODU is ready to be connected to the grounding cable and to the Lan cable
MN.00273.E - 006 97
Warning: Leave 25 cm straight Lan cable between Amphenol connector and first bending to secure water-
proof IPX5
8.9.1.2 Waveguide towards the antenna
After having installed the ODU in 1+0 configuration, the waveguide towards the antenna must be installed.
• 1+0: the waveguide must be fixed to the antenna flange on the supporting plate of the ODU. In
case of flexible waveguides, an excessive folding can damage the waveguide, see Tab.23 for details.
8.10 WAVEGUIDE BENDING
Tab.23 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency
Bending radius with- Bending radius with- Bending radius with Bending radius with
out rebending out rebending rebending rebending
Frequency
mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
E-plane a H-plane b E-plane a. H-plane b.
15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)
18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)
23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)
38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)
a. Bending E-plane
Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)
b. Bending H-plane
Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)
98 MN.00273.E - 006
O-ring
Coupling kit
Fig.35 - ODU with standard coupling kit
MN.00273.E - 006 99
3
Fig.36 - 1+0 ODU installation
100 MN.00273.E - 006

114-60
3
Fig.37 - 1+0 antenna flange
MN.00273.E - 006 101

8.11 ACCESSORIES FOR INSTALLATION
In the following a list of materials to be used during installation.
Tab.24 - Accessories for installation
SIAE code Descriptions View
Fibre optical splitter distribution box

U00921a
for 1 ODU
Junction box IP66, for fallen of optical

U00922a. b
cable to connect 2 ODU
J23599 Amphenol wrench connector
M03148 9x360 nylon ties cable
ICD00072F Universal kit cable grounding
15...42GHz TR installation kit

V60052
(Standard type)
102 MN.00273.E - 006

V42025 Grounding cable kit for ODU 1+0
AAAL00033 ODU solar shield (optional)
a. Optical box IP67

U00899
150x250x46
c
ICD001134 RJ45 Indoor Surge Protector
MN.00273.E - 006 103

d
M21565 Self locking clamp 1X
M21564 d. Self locking clamp 2X
Flexible spiralled sheath self-extin-

IFA000155
guishing conduit for ODU ( = 32mm)
a. Boxes don’t foresee replacement seals.

b. If the second ODU connection takes place much later than the first one, it is possible that the closing
of U00922 box doesn’t guarantee the seal tightness.
c. This unit provides Bi-Directional protection. Input and output cables may be interchanged.
d. Hooking on = 8÷25 round and 3-25mm Flat
104 MN.00273.E - 006

8.11.1 Installation procedure of optical box
Components
Fig.38 - Components
Recommended tools (not included)
Fig.39 - Recommended tools (not included)
MN.00273.E - 006 105

Installation
1. Open the cover by special key and screw off the middle plate
Fig.40
2. Take off the adapter panel, put it back after installing adapters
Fig.41
3. Fix PLC splitter, connect splitter ribbon fibres with output pigtails that coated loose tube, fix the ar-
ranged output pigtails with loose tube to tray. Lead output pigtail to the other side of the tray and
insert adaptor.
106 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.42
4. Remove the input entry holder and tension member, put stripped fibre through rubber ring and fix;
then guide the fibres in sleeve to splice with input of splitter.
Fig.43
MN.00273.E - 006 107

5. Fibre connection, coiling and storage, fixing, suitable for 2mm (or 3mm) pigtail and drop cable.
Fig.44
108 MN.00273.E - 006

6. Check and lock the door
Fig.45
7. Installation:
- pole mounted, make pole band pass through bracket’s hole, fix the bracket to the pole by fas-
tening pole band’s bolts
- wall mounted, mark the target point on the bracket to target point by nail or bolt.
Fig.46 - On pole
Fig.47 - Wall mounted
MN.00273.E - 006 109

8.11.2 RJ45 crimping tool
The recommended RJ45 crimping tool is shown in Tab.25.
Tab.25 - Recommended RJ45 crimping tool
HTS2500 crimp tool for shielded plugs

J01977 with strain relief, one step
(L-COM Global Connectivity)
Warning: the electrical connectivity is guaranteed only with coded connector. Please don’t use other mo-
dalities (the RJ45 plug for indoor and outdoor must always be shielded).
8.11.2.1 Use standard RJ45 crimper
As shown in Fig.48, the comb of a standard crimper is inserted in the housing to fasten the indoor RJ45
shielded (P03192) connector, while in the case of an outdoor RJ45 shielded (P20051) which has a shorten
dimension, the comb could destroy the connector and therefore do not ensure Ethernet Connectivity, so it
is important unscrew/remove it as shown in the Fig.49.
The comb
The comb
Fig.48 - Standard RJ45 crimper used for RJ45 indoor connector
110 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.49 - Standard RJ45 crimper (without comb) used for RJ45 shielded indoor connector
8.12 USER CONNECTORS
ALFOplus provides an auxiliary connector (M12) and 2 Amphenol connector, which guarantee Ethernet port
compatibility for both version: Gigabit electrical and optical.
Warning: to ensure waterproofing, don’t forget to close the port after use, with relevant cap.
8.12.1 Auxiliary connector
The auxiliary 5 pin circulator connector has various functions and it is used when:
• the Power over Ethernet injector through the data Lan cable is not available or as additional power
supply source
• during the alignment of antenna (remember to enable received signal strength indicator in
Equipment menu - General preset RSSI
It is recommended after the alignment to set RSSI as Disable not to overload CPU
• In case of emergency, if ALFOplus IP address is unknown, connect it with serial console (F03594),
as shown in Fig.68 using hyperterminal 115200 8, N, 1 and press any button to access in the login.
The available auxiliary cables already assembled:
• F03594 cable for laboratory use only (see Fig.68)
• F03608 2xM12 5P pointing cable (remove it after commissioning pointing) (see Fig.69).
MN.00273.E - 006 111

Tab.26 - Auxiliary power cable
P04185 Female 5 pin M12 shielded connector
Outdoor power supply cable

M10154
2x0.75mmq for distance 100m
Outdoor power supply cable

M10166
2x1.5mmq for distance 200m
Assembly steps for M12 male/female connector and conductor
a= slide on parts
b= strip conductor, widen shield and lay around the shielding ring, cuf off projecting mesh. Slide cores
through the housing. mount shielding ring, gasket and clamping cage. Tighten pressure screw to fix the
cable. Screw down cores. Mount male/female part. Tighten pressure screw.
Fig.50 - Functional drawing
112 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.51 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector
Schematic diagram
Fig.52 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)
Fig.53 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view
Tab.27 - Pinout M12 connector
Pinout Description
1 Vdc (-) = -48 Volts
2 Vdc (+) = 0 Volts
3 Rx_Console
4 Tx_Console & Vpointing (+)
5 GND_Console & Vpointing (-)
Shield Ground
MN.00273.E - 006 113

8.12.2 RJ45 connector
The electrical RJ45 connection to ALFOplus is guaranteed only with coded connector; do not use other con-
nectors, because the proper one is different from the RJ45 standard.
Part to be assembled (see Tab.28)
Tab.28 - Part to be assembled
SIAE code Description View
Amphenol kit RJ45 shielded full out-

P20032
door connector
Data cable SF/UTP CAT5e for outdoor

M02472
(AWG 24) 100 Ohm
Indoor RJ45 boot protection black

M05184
=6mm
P03192 a
Indoor RJ45 shielded plug
P20051 a. Outdoor RJ45 shielded
a. Don’t use different RJ45.
114 MN.00273.E - 006

1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet cables and connectors
Please be aware that modifying Ethernet cables improperly may cause loss of network connectivity. Please
follow colours of wiring.
Tab.29 - Wiring 1000Base-T
Assignment T568A T568B

Pin
1000Base-T Colour wire Colour wire
1 BI_DA+ WHT/GRN WHT/ORG
2 BI_DA- GRN ORG
3 BI_DB+ WHT/ORG WHT/GRN
4 BI_DC+ BLU BLU
5 BI_DC- WHT/BLU WHT/BLU
6 BI_DB- ORG GRN
7 BI_DD+ WHT/BRN WHT/BRN
8 BI_DD- BRN BRN
Fig.54 - Straight Ethernet cable
Fig.55 - RJ-45 Pinout
MN.00273.E - 006 115

Fig.56 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly
LAN Cable connector - P20032 - Assembly procedure for RJ sealed connectors
Procedure to be used for terminating and assembling of Amphenol Connector Kit
Fig.57 - P20032 kit
Step 1
Feed CAT cable through boot and connector housing as shown below.
Warning: Care should be taken not to damage the rubber sealing gasket inside the rear of the connector
housing.
Fig.58 - Boot connector
116 MN.00273.E - 006

Step 2
Terminate RJ-45 connector onto CAT cable
Strip jacketing and shield as shown
Fold shield back onto jacketing. Wrap grain wire

one and a half times around the shield. Trim ex-
cess length from drain wire
Untwist pairs and arrange to desired order.

Note: it is recommended to follow TIA-568 spec-
ifications for wiring orientation
Trim conductors at an angle and insert into the
loading bar
Trim excess wire from holder

Insert prepared cable into RJ-45 Plug
Bend strain relief to lay along cable
Crimp plug and strain relief a
a. Use recommended RJ45 crimping tool.
MN.00273.E - 006 117

Warning It is mandatory to verify with Ethernet tester (not supplies) the proper connectivity of both ends,
in order to avoid autonegotiation problems (as for example 1Gbps full duplex not reached).
Fig.59 - Assembled Amphenol
ALIGN THE KEYS AND

PUSH
KEY ODU CONNECTOR
Fig.60 - Cable connector keys
118 MN.00273.E - 006

Step 3
Insert terminated RJ-45 plug into connector housing.
While holding the connector body, pull cable through connector housing until RJ plus is near to the housing.
Align the plug latch with the connector housing keyway.
Depress Plug latch and completely insert the RJ plug into the housing.
Fig.61 - Connector housing
Step 4
Attach and tighten sealing boot using a 19mm wrench.
Recommended tightening torque is 5.5 to 6.0 (in-lbs) or 0.62 to 0.68 (N-m)
Fig.62 - Connector tight
MN.00273.E - 006 119

Fig.63 - P20032
120 MN.00273.E - 006

OK
NO
Fig.64 - Connector positions
Warning: Tighten all unused connectors with the appropriate cover using the proper wrench J23599 (see
Fig.65).
MN.00273.E - 006 121

Fig.65 - Locking key for Amph. connectors - J23599
122 MN.00273.E - 006

Tighten strongly LAN
connectors by means
of key to ensure the
complete isola!on
Tighten with the

proper plug M12 the
connector unused
P04185 (connector M12 female 5p shelded)

Outdoor LAN connector
(LAN1-LAN2) P20032
Cable M10154 (Outdoor power supply

cable 2x0.75mmq)
Fig.66 - Assembled connectors
8.12.3 Optical connector
- ODU optical cable see Tab.30 and Fig.71, Fig.72, Fig.73
- Optical jumper see Tab.31 and Fig.74
- Operating temperature range -40° C to +85°C
MN.00273.E - 006 123

- Protection class IP67
- LC optical transceivers (SFP) see Tab.32
Tab.30 - List of Amphenol optical cable
Description SIAE Code
Jumper LC/SFP - Open end L=2.5M (MM) P20034
Jumper LC/SFP - LC/LC L=25M (MM) P20035
Jumper LC/SFP - LC/SFP L=2.5M (MM) P20038
Jumper LC/SFP - Open end L=2.5M (SM) P20043
Jumper LC/SFP - LC/LC L=25M (SM) P20044
Jumper LC/SFP - LC/SFP L=2.5M (SM) P20047
Jumper LC/SFP - LC/LC L=2.5M (MM) P20052
Jumper LC/SFP - LC/LC L=2.5M (SM) P20053
Tab.31 - List of optical jumper outdoor LC/LC
Opt. Jumper Outdoor SM LC/LC DUP L=15M F15200
124 MN.00273.E - 006

Opt. Jumper Outdoor SM 4LC-4LC L=25M F15221
Opt. Jumper Outdoor MM LC-LC DUP L=15M F15300
Optical cab. 2 fiber outdoor MM 50/125 M10300
Optical cab. 2 fiber outdoor SM 50/125 M10301
Tab.32 - LC optical transceiver (SFP)
Wavelength Eye safety

Siae code Type Mode ( m) km
(nm) class
E01413 100BaseFx Multimode 62.5/125 1310 2 1
E01414 1000BaseLx Singlemode 9/125 1310 10 1
E01415 1000BaseSx Multimode 50/125 850 0.55 1
E01419 1000BaseLx Singlemode 9/125 1310 10 1
E01428 1000BaseSx Multimode 50/125 850 0.3 1
MN.00273.E - 006 125

126
AMPHENOL
OPT. CABLE
MULTI MODE
Siae P/N length P20052 - JUMPER LC/SFP - LC/LC L=2,5m ( mul!mode)
P20048 15 m. P20053 - JUMPER LC/SFP - LC/LC L=2,5m ( singlemode)
P20035 25 m.
P20049 35 m.
P20036 50 m. U00899 - U00900 - U00921 OPTICAL BOX
P20050 75 m.
P20037 100 m. F15200 - OPT. JUMPER SM LC-LC DUP L=15M
F15201 - OPT. JUMPER SM LC-LC DUP L=25M
SINGLE MODE
Siae P/N length
F15202 - OPT. JUMPER SM LC-LC DUP L=50M
P20056 15 m. F15203 - OPT. JUMPER SM LC-LC DUP L=100M
P20044 25 m. F15300 - OPT. JUMPER MM LC-LC DUP L=15M
Fig.67 - IDU-ODU optical connection

P20046 100 m. In d o o r u n it In d o o r u n it M10300 - OPTICAL CAB. 2 FIBER MM 50/125
P20055 200 m. M10301 - OPTICAL CAB. 2 FIBER SM 9/125
MN.00273.E - 006
8.12.4 Optical SFP mounting procedure
Follow the instructions:
• plug the SFP module into LC embedded connectors until “Click” (see Fig.75 and Fig.76)
• pull lightly the SFP and check that it is locked to the connector (see Fig.77)
• insert plugged SFP on ALFOplus optical cage (see Fig.78)
• lock the connector by turning the nut (see Fig.79).
8.12.5 Optical SFP unmounting procedure
Follow the instructions:
• unlock the connector by untightening the nut
• eject SFP module from ALFOplus Optical cage

• to unplug thr SFP from LC connector, push the locking by keeping a finger below the SFP module
(see Fig.80).
Warning: don't insert the SFP module inside the housing of the ODU without the preliminary connection
between cable and the SFP as described in this paragraph.
MN.00273.E - 006 127

Fig.68 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only
128 MN.00273.E - 006

+20
1530 0 - GET VALUE FROM LAST DIGITS OF PART DESCRIPTION
N.B.2
MN.00273.E - 006
7
1
see N.B.
F -----
CM2 N.B.2
6
N.B.2
35 6
4 N.B.1
5
1
4 4 5
2
WIRES CONNECTION 3
3 SIDE ENLARGED VIEW
CF1
60
N.B.1 4 RED
BLACK
2
5
1
WIRES CONNECTION 4
SIDE ENLARGED VIEW 2
3
N.B. - PART MUST BE LABELLED WITH HOT TIGHTENING RING, DISPLAYING:

- PART NUMBER/REVISION;
- MANUFACTURER ID (REG. MARK OR INITIAL);
- MANUFACTURING DATE (WEEK/YEAR);
- ELECTRICAL TEST PROVEN ("TE" MARK).
N.B.1 - STRIP THE CABLE RESPECTING THE DIMENSION SHOW IN THE DRAWING
N.B.2 - CABLE HEAT SHRINKABLE
CM2-1 CF1-1 WHITE/BROWN+ BROWN
CM2-2 CF1-2 WHITE/ORANGE + ORANGE
*1 CM2-3 CF1-3 WHITE/BLUE
Fig.69 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)

2
CM2-4 CF1-4 BLUE 5 CF1-4 *3 RED 0,6 mm (Blue)
2
CM2-5 CF1-5 WHITE/GREEN 4 CF1-5 *2 BLACK 06 mm (Green)
Part FROM TO Part FROM TO

COLOURS NOTES
Ref. COURSE Ref. COURSE
129
Fig.70 - ALFOplus connectors
Fig.71 - Jumper LC/SFP - LC/LC
Fig.72 - Jumper LC/SFP - Open end
130 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.73 - Jumper LC/SFP - LC/SFP
Fig.74 - Opt. jumper outdoor LC/LC
Fig.75 - Amphenol LC connector
MN.00273.E - 006 131

Fig.76 - Amphenol SFP/LC connector locked
Fig.77 - Amphenol SFP/LC connector check
Fig.78 - SFP into ALFOplus
132 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.79 - Locked connection
Fig.80 - Unplug SFP
MN.00273.E - 006 133

134 MN.00273.E - 006
Section 4.
LINE-UP
9 LINE-UP OF ALFOPLUS
9.1 GENERAL
The line-up consists of the following steps:
• switch on the equipment
• alarm leds check
• connection procedure
• equipment configuration (through PC software)
• optimizing antenna orientation
• check of Ethernet connections
• quality evaluation with performance monitoring
Operations involving the use of SCT/WebLCT are roughly described here. For further details please refer
to software manual.
9.2 SWITCH ON
Checks to be performed before switching on the unit are:
• check external power supply voltage
• antenna presence - check the connection between ODU output flange and antenna.
If everything is correct, switch on the ODU.
MN.00273.E - 006 135

9.3 ALARM LED CHECK
On the rear panel of ODU unit there is a transparent plastic window to see the status of an internal LED
dedicated to show unit alarms. Further information about ALFOplus alarms can be found onto Section 5.
MAINTENANCE.
9.4 CONNECTION PROCEDURE
Connection between PC and ALFOplus can only occur if the IP address of the PC and the radio belong to
the same subnet and it can be made directly or through a switch on the LAN2 connector.
Using Subnetwork Craft Terminal (SCT) (you know IP address):
1. press button Options, a window will open; select card Connection

2. select Connect using local area network (see Fig.81)
3. press OK and Connect
4. type the equipment IP address stored previously (Factory Default are 172.20.254.14/16 ODU L and
172.20.255.15/16 ODU H)
- Default User: SYSTEM
- Default Password: SIAEMICR

5. after connection it’s possible to modify IP address, etc.....
Using WebLCT console (WLC) (you know IP address):
1. add the IP address of radio in the LAN address book (see Fig.85)
2. press double click over the IP address to open the browser.
Rescue connection using SCT (you don’t know IP address)
1. Assign a static IP address (see Fig.82) to PC (172.20.253.14/255.255.0.0)

ALFOplus rescue IP address: 172.20.253.13
ALFOplus rescue subnetwork mask: 255.255.0.0
2. Connect your PC directly to ALFOplus with a LAN cable
3. By SCT, connect using Local Area Network, press connect button, type equipment user/password
and press RESCUE button (see Fig.83)
4. Follow the instructions of rescue login (see Fig.84)
5. In “Rescue Connection” mode it is possible to set or recover the values for management access.
Rescue connection using WLC (you don’t know IP address)
1. Assign a static IP address (see Fig.82) to PC (172.20.253.14/255.255.0.0).

ALFOplus rescue Subnetwork Mask: 255.255.0.0
3. By WLC, press the arrow down near the button connect and press “Rescue connection” (see Fig.85)
4. Type equipment user/password and follow the instructions of rescue login (see Fig.86)
5. In “Rescue connection” mode it is possible to set or recover the values for management access.
136 MN.00273.E - 006

Rescue connection using “Command Prompt” (you don’t know IP address)
1. Assign a static IP address (see Fig.82) to PC (172.20.253.14/255.255.0.0)

AFOplus rescue Subnetwork Mask: 255.255.0.0
3. By command prompt, type “ping 172.20.253.13 -t” and press Enter.
4. Restart hardware ALFOplus
5. Wait till the ping reply, open Internet Explorer, type in the URL: 172.20.253.13 and press F5 until
the login menu appears
6. In rescue connection mode it is possible to set or recover the values for management access.
Emergency connection (you don’t know IP address)
1. Connection between PC and ALFOplus with serial console cable (F03594) in auxiliary connector
2. using Hyperterminal - serial COM at 115200bps, 8bits, none parity, 1 stop bit, no flow control and
press “Enter” button to access in the login
3. after login will be shown the radio IP address

4. type “Config” if you want to change the boot parameters (IP address, etc...)
Fig.81 - Connection option
MN.00273.E - 006 137

Fig.82 - IP address setting
Fig.83 - Login connection using SCT
138 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.84 - Rescue login using SCT
Fig.85 - Web LCT console
MN.00273.E - 006 139

Fig.86 - Rescue connection using WLC
9.5 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
To activate a radio link it is necessary to program the ODU (local and remote side) in some basic items
listed in the following:
• bandwidth & modulation
• Tx frequency & power
• port configuration
• agent IP address and equipment ID
• store routing table
• remote element list
• restart equipment
Bandwidth and Modulation setting
See Fig.87.
Into WebLCT at position:
• Equipment menu
• Equipment - BW & MOD/LINK ID
• In Capacity and Modulation card, you can select Bandwidth&Modulation desired. Press Apply
and Confirm
• Enable or disable ACM Engine, if you want dynamic modulation. Press Apply and Confirm
Warning: Use the same parameters on remote unit.
140 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.87 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID
Tx frequency setting
See Fig.88. Into WebLCT at position:
• Equipment menu
• Radio Branch
• Settings card: in this card you have to select Duplex frequency and Tx frequency; Rx frequency
value is shown in the top status bar and is set automatically. Press Apply and Confirm.
Local Tx frequency must be set equal to remote Rx frequency. Please set the frequency according to your
license.
Warning: Remember that the whole radio link can work only if ODUs chosen for local and remote side have
equal sub-band and different Tx module (example of permissible pair ODU 1H and ODU 1L).
Tx power setting
See Fig.88. Into WebLCT at position:
• Equipment menu
• Radio Branch
• Powers card: in this card you have to set Tx power equal to radio planning value or if you do not
know it to maximum Tx power; in this card it is possible to enable automatic transmission power
control but it is important to set properly ATPC thresholds: Rx Level Min, Rx Level Max (see para-
graph 7.1.7 ATPC and ACM interaction). Press Apply and Confirm.
Warning: Use the same parameters at remote ODU.
MN.00273.E - 006 141

Fig.88 - Frequency and power setting
Port configuration setting
See Fig.89.

• Equipment menu
• Main - Port configuration
• In Ethernet card you can modify the IP address, netmask and supervisioning parameters. Press
Apply and Confirm. Press Store and Confirm.
Warning: For remote radio management change port settings in “Out of Band” or “Drop Node” or “In Band”
on both sites.
Fig.89 - Port configuration
142 MN.00273.E - 006

Agent IP address setting
See Fig.90.
• Equipment menu
• Main - Equipment properties
• In General Info card, change the equipment ID and agent IP address equal to Ethernet IP ad-
dress. Press Apply and Confirm.
Fig.90 - Equipment properties
Store routing table setting
See Fig.91.

• Equipment menu
• Main - Store routing table
• Type the default gateway IP address and select Lan Interface and/or add manually the routing
command.
• Press Apply and Confirm. Press Save and Confirm.
Fig.91 - Store routing table
MN.00273.E - 006 143

Remote element list setting
See Fig.92.
Into WebLCT at right position:
• Press the button to expand Remote Element List window
• Clear and Apply new list
• Add station, type “SIAE LINK” and press OK
• Select the station just created and add local element:
- IP address: type local radio IP address
- type of element: managed by SCT

Press OK, Apply and Confirm.
• Add remote element:
- IP address: type remote radio IP address
- Type of element: Remote link

Press OK, Apply and Confirm.
Restart equipment
See Fig.92.
• Equipment menu
• Main - Equipment properties
• Press the button Restart Equipment and Confirm.
Fig.92 - Remote element list
144 MN.00273.E - 006

9.6 OPTIMIZING ANTENNA ALIGNMENT WITH RX MEASUREMENT
When the whole radio link is on, antenna alignment can be optimised. Antenna alignment optimization is
performed depending on the Rx signal power at local and remote equipment and evaluating both local and
remote S/N value maximizing them.
There are two possibilities to see the Rx signal power level:
• through WebLCT interface
• through a voltmeter connected to Auxiliary connector on the ODU (F03608 cable - see Fig.69).
In order to get the Rx signal power level via software, connect the PC to ALFOplus (LAN2) and start the
communication towards the ODU microcontroller with SCT/WebLCT supervisory program.
Into WebLCT is shown in the top status bar (Rx1A=-value dBm) see Fig.92.
If you’re using a voltmeter the Rx signal power level is available on the auxiliary connector of ODU, the
measurement can be performed with a proper cable (see Fig.69).
Following this last procedure, the voltage you’re reading with the voltmeter is proportional to Rx power
level, refer to Tab.33.
Tab.33 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port
Received Signal (dBm) Signal Output (V) Error (dB)
-20 4.68 ±5
-30 3.51 ±5
-40 2.34 ±3
-50 1.17 ±3
-60 0 ±3
-70 -1.17 ±3
-80 -2.34 ±3
-90 -3.51 ±5
-100 -4.68 ±5
Formula RSSI=Offset + (Signal Output)/Slope
Slope (V/dB) 0.117
Offset (dBm) -60
Typical Rx signal power level: -40dBm. It is the most important item to optimise the antenna alignment,
but in a situation of interference Rx level can be good, BER acceptable but S/N margin low. This means
that when Rx fields will decrease then BER will increase fast. The situation can be easily shown with SCT/
WebLCT software looking at Signal Quality level.
Into WebLCT Software select:
• Equipment menu
• Maintenance
• S/N Meas. card (see Fig.94)
The S/N at nominal Rx level, read by means of WebLCT, must be 38dB @1024QAM (typical S/N: 39dB)
(see Fig.94).
MN.00273.E - 006 145

Fig.93 - Main menu with Rx signal power level
Fig.94 - S/N measurement monitoring
Antenna aiming
Antenna aiming devices allow to perform the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming po-
sition:
- horizontal ± 15° operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.95, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.96.
- vertical ± 15° operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.95
only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.96 and (4) of Fig.95
For adjustment from 0° to +30° extract nut (1) Fig.96 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.96 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.96 and (4) of Fig.95.
For adjustment from 0° to –30° extract nut (1) of Fig.96 and position it in hole
(3), extract nut (2) of Fig.96 and position it in hole (5). Operate on vertical
adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.96
and (4) of Fig.95.
For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10°, are available on support. The bigger marker gives 0°
starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1),
(2), (11) of Fig.96 and (4) of Fig.95 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.96
for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and 32 Nm torque.
- grounding The grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and
flat washers as shown.
146 MN.00273.E - 006

3
4
5 1
2
Fig.95 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment
MN.00273.E - 006 147

15 mm wrench 15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque 32 Nm torque
7
4 11 1 8
3
10
9 15 mm wrench
5 6 32 Nm torque
2
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque
Fig.96 - Antenna aiming block
9.7 ODU ACCESSING AND REMOTE MANAGEMENT
Local ALFOplus ODU and its remote ODU can be accessed via LAN2 or LAN1 ports depending on supervi-
sioning parameters, once the radio link has been initialized correctly (Local&Remote). In SCT the window
(see Fig.97) shows the network elements belonging to selected station. In the “login” column you can
check the actual user profile of equipment (System=Administrator; Monitor=Read only) and check the lo-
cal radio (Local) and the remote radio (Remote Link).
To change the User Profile, select the network element and press Login.
To connect to remote radio you can press double click in Remote Link Element or select Remote Link
- Equipment - LCT interface.
In WebLCT software press button Open Far End button to open and manage the remote radio window. If
the remote link is not visible, it means that the Remote Element List is missing in the local ODU (in SCT-
Tools - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard).
148 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.97 - Remote accessing
9.8 COMMISSIONING MEASURES FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC
9.8.1 Ethernet connection stability
Settings
To verify the Ethernet performances set the equipment following Tab.34
Tab.34 - Ethernet connection stability
Local Terminal Remote terminal
LAN1 LAN2 PORT A LAN1 LAN2 PORT A
Rate Control Full Rate Full Rate Port Enable Full Rate Full Rate Port Enable
Flow Control Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
Master/Slave Master Master Master Master
M/S Autoneg. Disable Disable Disable Disable

Lan Setting
MAC learning Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
Auto Auto
Speed/Duplex Auto (1Gbit) Auto (1Gbit)
(100Mbit) (100Mbit)
Cable crossover Auto Auto Auto Auto
MN.00273.E - 006 149

Local Terminal Remote terminal
LAN1 LAN2 PORT A LAN1 LAN2 PORT A

Port Based VLAN
LAN1 / Disable Enable / Disable Enable

Virtual Lan (802.1Q)
LAN2 Disable / Enable Disable / Enable
Port A Enable Enable / Enable Enable /
802.1q Manage-
Fallback Disable Fallback Fallback Disable Fallback
ment
Default Vid 101 102 111 101 102 111
Port default Port default Port default Port default

Priority 802.1P
0 7 0 7
Max Packet size 2048 byte
Mac address
300 sec
aging time
Ethernet Switch
QinQ ETH Type 9100
Priority
Native 802.1p
Radio to Lan
Priority
Native 802.1p
LAN to radio
After checking commissioning measures it is mandatory to fill “SIAE commissioning report” and send it to
SIAE database, ready to be checked when necessary.
These reports are very important for SIAE and for the customer because they certify the conformity of SIAE
link.
Only in case you don’t have this document, the full backup file .bku can be generate using SCT.
9.9 FIRMWARE UPDATE
Firmware can be updated using the software SCT or WebLCT Console. There are two different memory
benches: one containing the running firmware and the other the stand-by firmware. This permits to down-
load a new firmware release to the stand-by bench without cutting the traffic.
Use the “Bench Switch” to activate the bench in stand-by (SW restart will be performed). There is a firm-
ware version for both ODUs: GE and GO:
• N10052 - ALFOplus: radio full outdoor with transport of IP Ethernet traffic.
9.9.1 Scope
Scope of this paragraph is to provide a procedure that described, step by step, how to perform the software
upgrade of ALFOplus equipment.
Downloading time depends on the connection used between PC and ALFOplus.
Warning: In order to transfer data “Web LCT console” or “Subnetwork Craft Terminal” running is necessary.
150 MN.00273.E - 006

9.9.2 Procedure of firmware update
Follow the steps below to perform the software upgrade of ALFOplus equipment.
Boot download
1. Unzip files E82108xxx.zip in a suitable directory of the PC used to perform the upgrade.
2. Connect to the equipment using the SCT or the WebLCT (login as “System”).
3. Open the Software Download window:
- using SCT, select Version from Equipment menu and press Download SW setup
- using WebLCT, select Software Info&Maint (see Fig.98) from Equipment menu and press
Upgrade (see Fig.99)
4. Select the file E82108.dwl (boot firmware) from the directory boot_e82108_xxyyzz.
5. Select Only difference or not present/peripheral as download mode.

6. Start the download and confirm by clicking on the window that pops-up.
7. At the end of the boot firmware download, the equipment Controller will automatically restart. Wait
for the restart to be completed.
System version download
1. Unzip files N10052-01 XXX.zip in a suitable directory of the PC used to perform the upgrade.
2. Connect to the equipment using the SCT or the WebLCT (login as “System”).
3. Open the Software Download window:
- using SCT, select Version from Equipment menu and press Download SW setup
- using WebLCT, select Software Info&Maint (see Fig.98) from Equipment menu and press
Upgrade (see Fig.99)
4. Select the file N10052.dwl (system version) from the directory bin.
5. Select Forced as download mode.
6. Start the download and confirm by clicking on the window that pops-up
7. At the end of the system version download, to activate the new system version a bench switch is
required: click on Bench Switch and confirm by clicking on the window that pops-up.
Warning: the bench switch may be traffic affecting, depending on the system version previously running.
WebLCT download
1. Connect to the equipment using the WebLCT (login as “System”)
2. In Equipment menu - Software Info&Maint - WebLCT - Upload manager, press Browse and
select the file Web_25_N96108_xxyyzz
3. Press Upload button and Confirm
4. After the upload it is recommended to clear temporary internet files, cookies and history of the used
browser.
Warning: WebLCT can be uploaded from the IP address/uploader.HTML.
MN.00273.E - 006 151

Fig.98 - Software download procedure
Fig.99 - Upgrade software
9.10 BACKUP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSI-

BILITY OF MODIFYING THE PARAMETERS
9.10.1 Scope
This chapter describes the procedure to backup the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty or configuration mismatch.
Warning: In order to transfer data, WebLCT Console or Subnetwork Craft Terminal running is necessary.
152 MN.00273.E - 006

9.10.2 Backup/Restore Configuration using SCT
Backup Configuration
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools; Equipment Configuration Wizard
window will be displayed.
2. Select Upload and then Backup Full Equipment Configuration; Template Selection window will
be displayed.
3. Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).
4. Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from Upload Configuration File window.
5. Press OK and then edit the file name from Save backup as window.
6. Press Save; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word done showing the procedure success.
7. Press OK to finish.
Restore Configuration
Once the spare controller has been installed, or every time you need the primitive configuration, proceed
as follows:
1. Select Equipment Configuration Wizard from menu Tools. Equipment Configuration Wizard win-
dow will be displayed.
2. Select Download and than Restore Full Equipment Configuration from Equipment Configura-
tion Wizard. Select Backup File window will be displayed.
3. Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. Download Configuration
File window will be displayed.
4. Select the equipment to download and then press OK; Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The word
done indicates that download has been successfully.
5. Press OK to finish.
Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.
9.10.3 Backup/Restore Configuration using WEBLCT
Backup Configuration
Foreword: it is advisable to backup the configuration after the first installation. Proceed as follows:
1. select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu
2. in the field Backup File name write the name of the configuration file you are going to upload in the
PC, complete with the full path of its folder
3. push Backup. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the Operation Status field.
MN.00273.E - 006 153

Restore Configuration
Once the spare Controller has been installed or every time the saved configuration is necessary, proceed
as follow:
1. Select Backup/Restore Configuration in the Main menu
2. In the field Restore file name write the name of the configuration file you are going to download in
the ODU, complete with the full path of its folder
3. Push Restore. The status of the backup procedure is shown in the operation Status field. During
Restore operation the equipment creates a backup configuration, you can come back to this config-
uration at the end of the restore pushing Revert (see Fig.100)
Warning: the file full backup, making use of SCT, isn’t compatible with WebLCT and vice versa.
Fig.100 - Backup/Restore configuration
154 MN.00273.E - 006

Section 5.
MAINTENANCE
10 ALARMS
10.1 GENERAL
In this document is present a description of alarms in order to help operators to perform equipment trou-
bleshooting.
10.2 ALARM SYSTEM
There are two ways to identify the alarms:
• through LEDS
• through SCT/WebLCT
For each part of SIAE radio system, groups of alarms are defined. These alarms can be independent or
interdependent with each other, according to the real causes that generated them.
Alarms are divided into 4 severity levels according to the effects that an alarm might cause to the regular
operation of the unit detecting it. Levels are prioritised as follows:
• Critical (red): out-of service, hw failure, urgent alarm
• Major (orange): loss of signal, minimum residual functionality, urgent alarm
• minor (yellow): failure neither urgent, high residual functionality, not urgent alarm
• warning (light blue): indication or wrong configuration, not urgent alarm
• none (green) no alarm or masked alarm.
Critical and Major alarms indicate impossibility of executing a service, hence the faulty units needs to be
serviced. Minor level represents the not urgent alarms which do not prejudice service continuity.
Warning level indicates malfunctions that might be locally removed without having to replace the unit.
Alarm severity can be modified or masked in “alarm severity configuration” via SCT/WebLCT by the oper-
ator.
MN.00273.E - 006 155

10.2.1 LED status
The visual indication is given by a LED, which can be green or orange or red. The information provided are:
• Red light:
- ON - An internal alarm is active. Connect the PC for troubleshooting
- Flashing - An external alarm is active
• Green light:
- Flashing - No radio connection with far-end terminal
- ON - Radio connection with far-end terminal is active
• Orange light:
- During restart
During the power-up follows three status of display Led (see Tab.35)
Tab.35 - Bootstrap status display
2nd step - Loading We- 3rd step - Ready to

Led 1st step - boot strap
bLCT management
Green OFF OFF OFF/BLINKING
Red OFF ON OFF/BLINKING
Orange ON OFF OFF
10.2.2 Alarms group
Alarms are divided in groups to refer to a particular functionality and are characterized by programmable
severity.
Alarms, with group and a short description, are listed into Tab.36.
In the following you can find a class list and the item they describe:
• COMMON – Failure or status relevant to whole equipment
• ETH LAN - Failure on Ethernet traffic
• P.M. ACM - Performance monitoring on ACM
• P.M. G.828 – Performance monitoring on signal quality

• P.M. Rx Power – Performance monitoring on received signal
• P.M. Tx Power – Performance monitoring on transmitted signal
• Plug-in module - Alarm on plug-in device

• RADIO - Alarm on Tx/Rx section of Radio
• SETS - Synchronisation alarm or status
• SNTP - Server lost (unavailable in this SW version)
• Unit - Hardware or software unit alarm
156 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.36 - Alarms
Group WebLCT name Description
Equip Rmon Alarm Statistic Counter Ethernet
Equip Manual Operation At least one manual operation on

COMMON OAM FM Fail Alarm MEP not receiving
OAM FM MEP Configuration Mismatch

MEP not configured properly
Alarm
Eth Lan Phy Lacp Protocol Down Link aggregation not working
Eth Lan Phy Master Slave Configura- Autonegotiation GBit Frame configuration
tion Fault failed
Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Forwarding Link loss in remote port
ETH LAN
Eth Lan Phy Autonegotiation Autonegotiation failed
Eth Lan Phy Sync Synchronization not aligned
Eth Lan Phy Link Loss Loss of Ethernet signal
pm ACM - 24H Alarm

P.M. ACM ACM measurements on received radio signal
pm ACM - 15m Alarm
pm G828 - 24H SepAlarm
pm G828 - 15m SepAlarm
pm G828 - UAS Alarm

Quality measurements on radio signal re-
P.M. G.828 pm G828 - 24H Ses Alarm
ceived a
pm G828 - 24H ES Alarm
pm G828 - 15m Ses Alarm
pm G828 - 15m ES Alarm
pm RxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm

Rx Power measurements on radio signal re-
P.M. Rx Power
ceived a.
pm RxPwr - 15m Rlts Alarm
pm TxPwr - 24H Rlts Alarm

Tx Power measurements on radio signal
P.M. Tx Power
transmitted a.
pm TxPwr - 15m Rlts Alarm
Plug-in Los Alarm Loss of Signal on Module
Plug-in Module Alarm SFP module is missing

Plug-in module
Plug-in Module Mismatch Alarm Wrong SFP module
Plug-in Status Change SFP module is active
MN.00273.E - 006 157

Radio Config Mismatch Set BW&MOD mismatch on radio link
Radio Rx Quality Low Warning Received signal quality degraded
Radio Rx Quality Low Alarm Insufficient received signal quality
Radio Rx AGC Fail Automatic gain Control alarmed
Radio Rt Vco Fail Voltage Controlled Oscillator failure
Radio Tx Power Alarm Transmitted power below the fixed threshold
Radio Rx Power Low Alarm Received power below the fixed threshold
Radio Modulator Fail Alarm Alarm on radio transmitting side

RADIO
Radio Demodulator Fail Alarm Alarm on radio receiving side
Radio Rx Alarm Set Low received power on radio
Radio Invalid Frequency Alarm Set Wrong frequency on radio link
Bit error rate/Syncloss on received radio sig-

Radio Equip Ber Sync Loss Alarm
nal
Capacity is reduced respect the upper modu-

Radio Equip Reduced Capacity Alarm
lation
Radio Equip Link Telemetry Fail Alarm Telemetry failed to radio link missing
Radio Equip Link ID Alarm Wrong Link ID received
Timing Sync Active Status Timing Sync is active
Timing Sync Drift Alarm Selected Synch bad quality
Timing Sync Los Alarm Selected Synch missing

SETS
Timing Generator Holdover Status Equipment in holdover status
Timing Generator Free Running Sta-

Equipment in Free Running status
tus
Timing Generator T0 Fail Alarm T0 synch missing
SNTP Sntp Client Unicast Server Lost Server is missing
Unit SW Mismatch Alarm SW mismatch detected on the unit
Unit HW Mismatch Alarm HW mismatch detected on the unit
Unit Unit Not Responding Alarm No response from the unit
Unit Missing Alarm Missing condition on the unit
Unit Fail Alarm Failure on the unit
a. Regarding periods of 15 minutes or 24 hours.
158 MN.00273.E - 006

11 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
11.1 GENERAL
In the following pages are listed all the procedures to follow for ALFOplus maintenance.
When corrective maintenance is necessary, a troubleshooting procedure helps the operator to identify the
failure unit to replace it with a spare one.
11.2 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance consists of two stages:
1. periodical checks to be carried out using SCT/WebLCT

2. corrective maintenance.
Periodical checks serve to detect correct radio performance without the presence of any alarm condition.
Corrective maintenance takes place as soon as one or more alarm conditions are in existence. Operation
sequence to be carried out is shown in “Troubleshooting” paragraph.
11.2.1 Periodical checks
System routine maintenance consists in a series of routine checks aiming to verify correct operating mode
of an alarm–free system.
These checks are made through SCT/WebLCT program, installed on a PC.
The items to be checked are:
• Tx power (i.e., attenuation value in dB vs. nominal value)
• Rx field (value measured must comply with that resulting from hop calculation)
• S/N (presence of possible interference)
• BER (values measured must comply with hop calculations)
How these operations are carried out is specified in “Line–up” section or, more widely, in ALFOplus software
manual.
MN.00273.E - 006 159

11.2.2 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)
Corrective maintenance starts as soon as one or more alarm indication become active.
Corrective maintenance purpose is to locate the faulty unit and replace it with spare after having verified
that the cause of faulty is not external to the equipment.
Corrective maintenance does not include malfunction due to a wrong or incomplete configuration of the
system or to failure due to alarm indication system itself or any other cause external to the system, i.e.:
cabling damage, main voltage loss, antenna misalignment and propagation problems.
See paragraph 11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING for details.
11.3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Main purpose of troubleshooting is to identify the possible cause of alarm:
• propagations of microwave
- interference (in a link radio turn off the Ptx module (local&remote) and monitoring the Prx during
the day, active local Link ID)
- desalign of antenna (check positions and screws, maximize the voltage AUX connector present
in ODU),
- obstacle in the 1° Fresnel Zone (tree, tower building, etc....)
- using the “Performance Monitoring” Prx, Ptx, BER measuring

- particular condition (heavy rain, stratification of different air temperature, flat surface)
• radio hardware faulty
- alarms due to a wrong configurations or actual status of the radio

- faulty (using embedded radio BER test generator and loops, to check hardware failure)
• external event
- no constant 48 Volt power supply during the day/night

- very high temperature, humidity inside waveguide
- ODU operating range -33°C to +55°C; survival temperature range -40°C to +70°C
- ODU waterproof according to IP65 environmental class
The troubleshooting procedure is performed with:
• check value of power transmitter and receiver
• reading Current Alarms and Alarm History labels and trying to figure out which part of the equip-
ment is affected
• disabled All Manual Operations
• verifying with radio BER test a hardware failure or S/N measure
• verifying the correct initialization of the Local and Remote Radio

• HW restart
• factory default
• firmware update
• replace with a spare part.
160 MN.00273.E - 006

Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND
SUPERVISION
12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION
12.1 GENERAL
ALFOplus is programmed and supervised using SCT or WLC. This subject is fully described in the separated
software manual (WebLCT ALFOplus - Software application for the management of ALFOplus equipment).
Warning: operating system compatibility for SCT and WLC is Windows XP or Windows 7.
12.2 SUPERVISION THROUGH ETHERNET
The provided structure for Ethernet traffic defines the management facilities of "ALFOplus" unit.
MN.00273.E - 006 161

LAN1 Internal port
Radio side
SWD
Switching Device
LAN2
Mgt
Mac Rate adapter

Controller (fpga)
Fig.101 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit
12.2.1 General
In general the management plane can be configured to be managed “in band” , that is transported with
data and differentiated on the base of VLan, or out of band, where a port is exclusively dedicated to the
management. In particular, for management purposed, the LAN interfaces can be configured as follow:
• Disable - the management is not transported for that LAN

• Local Access Only - LAN is dedicated to the management and it allows to reach the local CPU only
• In Band - LAN is configured to transport both management and data: management is differentiated
by dedicated VLan
• Out Of Band (OOB) - LAN is dedicated to the management and the management forwarded over
the radio is maintained segregated from the data (in this application the segregation is virtually
achieved via LAN)
• Drop Node - LAN is dedicated to the management and it is possible to access to both local CPU and
the rest of the network.
The combinations of management configuration for LAN1 and LAN2 are shown in the following.
Disable - Local Access Only (LAO)
LAN1: Disable LAN1 is for data only

LAN2: LAO LAN2 is local management only
162 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.102
• Management LAN2 Only - Untagged
• Reachability: From LAN2 only the local CPU is reachable

Local CPU is NOT reachable from the remote ODU
• Data LAN1 only - Tagged/Untagged
Disable - Out Of Band
LAN1: Disable LAN1 is for data only
LAN2: Out Of Band LAN2 is local management only, dedicated bandwidth for the
management over the air
Fig.103
• Management LAN2 Only - Untagged

dedicated logical channel (bandwidth reserved over the radio link)
• Reachability: From LAN2: whole network

From Radio: whole network
InBand - Local Access Only
LAN1: In Band LAN1 is for data and management
LAN2: Local Access Only LAN2 is for local management only
MN.00273.E - 006 163

Fig.104
• Management LAN1 - Tagged

LAN2 - Untagged

From LAN2: only local P only
From remote (portA): whole network
In Band - Drop Node
LAN1: In Band LAN1 is for both data and management
LAN2: Drop Node LAN2 is for management only
Fig.105
• Management LAN1 - Tagged (InBandVlan)

LAN2 - Untagged

From LAN2: whole network
From radio: whole network
• Data LAN1 only - Tagged and Untagged
In Band - In Band
LAN1: In Band LAN1 and LAN2 are both for both data and management
LAN2: In Band
164 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.106
• Management LAN1 - Tagged (Tag=InBandVlan)

LAN2 - Tagged (Tag=InBandVlan)

From LAN2: whole network
• Data LAN1 and LAN2
In Band - Disable
LAN1: In Band LAN1 is for data and management
LAN2: In Band LAN2 is for data only
Fig.107
• Management LAN1 only - Tagged (Tag=InBandVlan)

• Data LAN1 and LAN2
MN.00273.E - 006 165

12.2.2 Configurability
The management mode of equipment affects the Ethernet Channel and on the Switch configuration (RSTP,
OAM, …). Therefore it is important to decide the optimal configuration of traffic Ethernet and management,
to avoid blocking traffic conditions.
In out of band a dedicated service channel for management does not exist, but this is forwarded to radio
side using “internal Vlan stacking” with priority7, so that traffic IP with priority 7 could affect the speed of
management traffic.
The disabling of PortA interface can cause outage of management and data traffic.
12.2.3 Address
The unit uses a single IP address associated at the management port of controller and a single "default
gateway".
12.2.4 Restore supervisioning access mode
The “RESTORE OF CPU ACCESS” command is available through Serial port (F03594 cable) via Hypertermi-
nal (115200bps,n,8,1):
• Login SYSTEM
• Password SIAEMICR
• Type string: lao

This string restores the setting of port configuration:
• LAN1 disable
• LAN2 local access only
166 MN.00273.E - 006

Section 7.
COMPOSITION
13 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT
13.1 GENERALS
There are several versions of ALFOplus, each of them with different hardware characteristics. If one of
these is inserted improperly in local and remote side, radio link does not work.
Following statements:
• you must have 2 ODUs, the first one working in the lower selected subband and the second one
working in the correspondent higher subband; e.g. 1L-1H, 2H - 2L, etc... (see Fig.108 and Fig.109).
Unit part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.
13.2 ODU PART NUMBER
Every version is identified by a specific part number (see Tab.38) shown on a label attached on each ODU.
other information such as power consumption, allowed configuration, feature key, system version, part
number P/N and serial number S/N are also written.
P/N consists of six digits with the following meaning (seeTab.37).
Tab.37 - ODU part number
Digit Letter/number Meaning
Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical

1 G
structure
2 B ALFOplus equipment
MN.00273.E - 006 167

6 Optical Gigabit Interface with circulator
7 Optical Gigabit Interface without circulator

3
8 Electrical Gigabit Interface with circulator
9 Electrical Gigabit Interface without circulator
4 to 6 from 000 to 795
Tab.38 - ALFOplus versions
Code Description Go-return (MHz) RF/Subband
GB6606 ODU ALFOplus 11 GO 490/530/500 11 GHz 1L
GB6607 ODU ALFOplus 11 GO 490/530/500 11 GHz 1H
GB6608 ODU ALFOplus 11 GO 490/530 11 GHz 2L
GB6609 ODU ALFOplus 11 GO 490/530 11 GHz 2H
GB6610 ODU ALFOplus 11 GO 490/530/500 11 GHz 3L
GB6611 ODU ALFOplus 11 GO 490/530/500 11 GHz 3H
GB6612 ODU ALFOplus 13 GO 266 13 GHz 1L
GB6613 ODU ALFOplus 13 GO 266 13 GHz 1H
GB 6628 ODU ALFOplus 15 GO 315/322 15 GHz 1L
GB 6629 ODU ALFOplus 15 GO 315/322 15 GHz 1H
GB 6646 ODU ALFOplus 15 GO 420 15 GHz 1L
GB 6647 ODU ALFOplus 15 GO 420 15 GHz 1H
168 MN.00273.E - 006

MN.00273.E - 006 169

GB 7518 ODU ALFOplus 7L GO 161 7L GHz 1L
GB 7519 ODU ALFOplus 7L GO 161 7L GHz 1H
GB 7534 ODU ALFOplus 7M GO 154 7M GHz 1L
GB 7535 ODU ALFOplus 7M GO 154 7M GHz 1H
170 MN.00273.E - 006

GB 7556 ODU ALFOplus 7H GO 245 7H GHz 1L
GB 7557 ODU ALFOplus 7H GO 245 7H GHz 1H
MN.00273.E - 006 171

GB 7710 ODU ALFOplus 17 GO a 144 17 GHz 1L
GB 7711 ODU ALFOplus 17 GO a. 144 17 GHz 1H
172 MN.00273.E - 006

GB 8606 ODU ALFOplus 11 GE 490/530/500 11 GHz 1L
GB 8607 ODU ALFOplus 11 GE 490/530/500 11 GHz 1H
GB 8608 ODU ALFOplus 11 GE 490/530 11 GHz 2L
GB 8609 ODU ALFOplus 11 GE 490/530 11 GHz 2H
GB 8612 ODU ALFOplus 13 GE 266 13 GHz 1L
GB 8613 ODU ALFOplus 13 GE 266 13 GHz 1H
MN.00273.E - 006 173

174 MN.00273.E - 006

GB 9474 ODU ALFOplus 7LM GE 161 7LM GHz 1L
GB 9475 ODU ALFOplus 7LM GE 161 7LM GHz 1H
GB 9518 ODU ALFOplus 7L GE 161 7L GHz 1L
GB 9519 ODU ALFOplus 7L GE 161 7L GHz 1H
MN.00273.E - 006 175

GB 9534 ODU ALFOplus 7M GE 154 7M GHz 1L
GB 9535 ODU ALFOplus 7M GE 154 7M GHz 1H
GB 9556 ODU ALFOplus 7H GE 245 7H GHz 1L
GB 9557 ODU ALFOplus 7H GE 245 7H GHz 1H
176 MN.00273.E - 006

MN.00273.E - 006 177

GB 9710 ODU ALFOplus 17 GE a.

144 17 GHz 1L
GB 9711 ODU ALFOplus 17 GE a.

144 17 GHz 1H
178 MN.00273.E - 006

a. Extended dynamic 40 dB.
Fig.108 - Label attached on ODU H
Fig.109 - Label attached on ODU L
MN.00273.E - 006 179

180 MN.00273.E - 006
Section 8.
RF CHARACTERISTICS
14 INTRODUCTION
14.1 GENERALS
This document describes technical specifications (international standards, frequency range, bandwidth,
power, sensitivities, ....) for all available frequencies of ALFOPlus.
MN.00273.E - 006 181

15 ALFOPLUS 7 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS
15.1 FOREWORD
The equipment complies with the following international standards:
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F.385-9 and CEPT Rec 02-06 for RF channel arrangement
• EN 302 217 for digital point to point fixed radio
• EN 300 132-2 characteristics of power supply
• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: Class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3)
• EN 60950-22 for Safety
• IEEE 802.3 for Ethernet interfaces
15.2 GENERAL
The reported values are guaranteed if not specifically defined otherwise.
15.2.1 Available frequencies
- Frequency band see Tab.45
Tab.39 - Frequency band
Frequency range Duplex spacing Reference

(MHz) (MHz) recommendation
7125 - 7425 154 CEPT REC02-06
ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 1

7425 - 7725 154
CEPT REC 02-06
7125 - 7425 161 ITU-R F.385-9
7250 - 7550 161 ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 5
7425 - 7725 161 ITU-R F.385-9

a
7110.5 - 7430.5 168 N.A.
7443 - 7750 168 ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 3
182 MN.00273.E - 006

7110 - 7443 196 ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 3
7425 - 7900 245 ITU-R F.385-9 - Annex 4
a. The frequency channel arrangement for this frequency band is based on national
regulations
- Modulation scheme 4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

128QAM/256QAM/512QAM/1024QAM
- Capacity see Tab.46
- RF filter range Wide Filter Option see Tab.47
- Transceiver tuning range see Tab.47
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.48 and Tab.49.
Tab.40 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Modulation Channel bandwidth (MHz)

Type
7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369
Tab.41 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 7GHz
FREQUENCY RANGE: 7125 ÷ 7425 MHz - GO-RETURN: 154 MHz

CEPT REC 02-06 - f0=7275 MHz
RF Filter Tuning Range

Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]
[MHz]
1 7128 - 7184 7282 - 7338
2 7184 - 7240 7338 - 7394

56
3 7212 - 7268 7366 - 7422
4 7156 - 7212 7310 - 7366

ITU-R F385-9 Annex 1 and CEPT REC 02-06- f0=7575 MHz
Sub Band
Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz]
AS ASN [MHz]
MN.00273.E - 006 183

7 1 7428 - 7484 7582 - 7638
8 2 7484 - 7540 7638 - 7694

56
9 3 7512 - 7568 7666 - 7722
10 4 7456 - 7512 7610 - 7666

ITU-R F385-9 - f0=7275 MHz

[MHz]
1 7124.5 - 7180.5 7285.5 - 7341.5
2 7180.5 - 7236.5 7341.5 - 7397.5

56
3 7208.5 - 7264.5 7369.5 - 7425.5
4 7152.5 - 7208.5 7313.5 - 7369.5

ITU-R F385-9 Annex 5 - f0=7400 MHz

[MHz]
1 7249 - 7309 7410 - 7470
2 7305 - 7365 7466 - 7526

60
3 7333 - 7393 7494 - 7554
4 7277 - 7337 7438 - 7498


[MHz]
1 7424.5 - 7480.5 7585.5 - 7641.5
2 7480.5 - 7536.5 7641.5 - 7697.5

56
3 7508.5 - 7564.5 7669.5 - 7725.5
4a. 7452.5 - 7508.5 7613. - 7669.5
FREQUENCY RANGE: 7110.5 ÷ 7430.5 MHz - GO-RETURN: 168 MHz

f0=7270.5 MHz

[MHz]
1 7110.5 - 7177.5 7278.5 - 7345.5
2 7166.5 - 7233.5 7334.5 - 7401.5

67
3 7194.5 - 7261.5 7362.5 - 7429.5
4 7138.5 - 7205.5 7306.5 - 7373.5


[MHz]
184 MN.00273.E - 006

1 7443 - 7499 7611 - 7667
2 7499 - 7555 7667 - 7723

56
3 7527 - 7583 7695 - 7751
4 a
7471 - 7527 7639 - 7695


[MHz]
1 7107 - 7163 7303 - 7359
2 7163 - 7219 7359 - 7415

56
3 7191 - 7247 7387 - 7443
a.
4 7135 - 7191 7331 - 7387

ITU-R F385-9 Annex 4 - f0=7662.5 MHz

[MHz]
1 7428 - 7512 7673 - 7757
2 7484 - 7568 7729 - 7813

84
3 7568 - 7652 7813 - 7897
4 a.
7540 - 7624 7785 - 7869
a. Subband 4 is available on request.
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.42.
MN.00273.E - 006 185

Tab.42 - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 7125 ÷ 7425 MHz - GO-RETURN: 154 MHz - 56 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1
Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

Channel
bandwidth Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency
[MHz]
Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz]
7 7131.5 7180.5 7285.5 7334.5
14 7135 7177 7289 7331
28 7142 7170 7296 7324
56 7156 7156 7310 7310
SUB BAND 2

Channel
[MHz]
7 7187.5 7236.5 7341.5 7390.5
14 7191 7233 7345 7387
28 7198 7226 7352 7380
56 7212 7212 7366 7366
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency
[MHz]
7 7215.5 7264.5 7369.5 7418.5
14 7219 7261 7373 7415
28 7226 7254 7380 7408
56 7240 7240 7394 7394
SUB BAND 4
Channel Lower half of the band Higher half of the band

bandwidth
[MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz]
7 7159.5 7208.5 7313.5 7362.5
14 7163 7205 7317 7359
28 7170 7198 7324 7352
56 7184 7184 7338 7338
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
7 7431.5 7480.5 7585.5 7634.5
186 MN.00273.E - 006

14 7435 7477 7589 7631
28 7442 7470 7596 7624
56 7456 7456 7610 7610
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7487.5 7536.5 7641.5 7690.5
14 7491 7533 7645 7687
28 7498 7526 7652 7680
56 7512 7512 7666 7666
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7515.5 7564.5 7669.5 7718.5
14 7519 7561 7673 7715
28 7526 7554 7680 7708
56 7540 7540 7694 7694
SUB BAND 4

bandwidth
7 7459.5 7508.5 7613.5 7662.5
14 7463 7505 7617 7659
28 7470 7498 7624 7652
56 7484 7484 7638 7638
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
7 7128 7177 7289 7338
14 7131.5 7173.5 7292.5 7334.5
28 7138.5 7166.5 7299.5 7327.5
56 7152.5 7152.5 7313.5 7313.5
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
MN.00273.E - 006 187

7 7184 7233 7345 7394
14 7187.5 7229.5 7348.5 7390.5
28 7194.5 7222.5 7355.5 7383.5
56 7208.5 7208.5 7369.5 7369.5
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7212 7261 7373 7422
14 7215.5 7257.5 7376.5 7418.5
28 7222.5 7250.5 7383.5 7411.5
56 7236.5 7236.5 7397.5 7397.5
SUB BAND 4

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7156 7205 7317 7366
14 7159.5 7201.5 7320.5 7362.5
28 7166.5 7194.5 7327.5 7355.5
56 7180.5 7180.5 7341.5 7341.5
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
7 7252.5 7305.5 7413.5 7466.5
14 7256 7302 7417 7463
28 7263 7295 7424 7456
56 7277 7281 7438 7442
SUB BAND 2

Channel
[MHz]
7 7308.5 7361.5 7469.5 7522.5
14 7312 7358 7473 7519
28 7319 7351 7480 7512
56 7333 7337 7494 7498
SUB BAND 3
188 MN.00273.E - 006

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7336.5 7389.5 7497.5 7550.5
14 7340 7386 7501 7547
28 7347 7379 7508 7540
56 7361 7365 7522 7526
SUB BAND 4

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7280.5 7333.5 7441.5 7494.5
14 7284 7330 7445 7491
28 7291 7323 7452 7484
56 7305 7309 7466 7470
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
7 7428 7477 7589 7638
14 7431.5 7473.5 7592.5 7634.5
28 7438.5 7466.5 7599.5 7627.5
56 7452.5 7452.5 7613.5 7613.5
SUB BAND 2

Channel
[MHz]
7 7484 7533 7645 7694
14 7487.5 7529.5 7648.5 7690.5
28 7494.5 7522.5 7655.5 7683.5
56 7508.5 7508.5 7669.5 7669.5
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7512 7561 7673 7722
14 7515.5 7557.5 7676.5 7718.5
28 7522.5 7550.5 7683.5 7711.5
56 7536.5 7536.5 7697.5 7697.5
MN.00273.E - 006 189

SUB BAND 4

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7456 7505 7617 7666
14 7459.5 7501.5 7620.5 7662.5
28 7466.5 7494.5 7627.5 7655.5
56 7480.5 7480.5 7641.5 7641.5
FREQUENCY RANGE: 7110.5 ÷ 7430.5 MHz - GO-RETURN: 168 MHz - 67 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7114 7174 7282 7342
14 7117.5 7170.5 7285.5 7338.5
28 7124.5 7163.5 7292.5 7331.5
56 7138.5 7149.5 7306.5 7317.5
SUB BAND 2

bandwidth
7 7170 7230 7338 7398
14 7173.5 7226.5 7341.5 7394.5
28 7180.5 7219.5 7348.5 7387.5
56 7194.5 7205.5 7362.5 7373.5
SUB BAND 3

Channel
[MHz]
7 7198 7258 7366 7426
14 7201.5 7254.5 7369.5 7422.5
28 7208.5 7247.5 7376.5 7415.5
56 7222.5 7233.5 7390.5 7401.5
SUB BAND 4

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7142 7202 7310 7370
14 7145.5 7198.5 7313.5 7366.5
28 7152.5 7191.5 7320.5 7359.5
190 MN.00273.E - 006

56 7166.5 7177.5 7334.5 7345.5
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7446.5 7495.5 7614.5 7663.5
14 7450 7492 7618 7660
28 7457 7485 7625 7653
56 7471 7471 7639 7639
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7502.5 7551.5 7670.5 7719.5
14 7506 7548 7674 7716
28 7513 7541 7681 7709
56 7527 7527 7695 7695
SUB BAND 3

bandwidth
7 7530.5 7579.5 7698.5 7747.5
14 7534 7576 7702 7744
28 7541 7569 7709 7737
56 7555 7555 7723 7723
SUB BAND 4

Channel
[MHz]
7 7474.5 7523.5 7642.5 7691.5
14 7478 7520 7646 7688
28 7485 7513 7653 7681
56 7499 7499 7667 7667
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7110.5 7159.5 7306.5 7355.5
MN.00273.E - 006 191

14 7114 7156 7310 7352
28 7121 7149 7317 7345
56 7135 7135 7331 7331
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7166.5 7215.5 7362.5 7411.5
14 7170 7212 7366 7408
28 7177 7205 7373 7401
56 7191 7191 7387 7387
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7194.5 7243.5 7390.5 7439.5
14 7198 7240 7394 7436
28 7205 7233 7401 7429
56 7219 7219 7415 7415
SUB BAND 4

bandwidth
7 7138.5 7187.5 7334.5 7383.5
14 7142 7184 7338 7380
28 7149 7177 7345 7373
56 7163 7163 7359 7359
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
7 7431.5 7508.5 7676.5 7753.5
14 7435 7505 7680 7750
28 7442 7498 7687 7743
56 7456 7484 7701 7729
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
192 MN.00273.E - 006

7 7487.5 7564.5 7732.5 7809.5
14 7491 7561 7736 7806
28 7498 7554 7743 7799
56 7512 7540 7757 7785
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7571.5 7648.5 7816.5 7893.5
14 7575 7645 7820 7890
28 7582 7638 7827 7883
56 7596 7624 7841 7869
SUB BAND 4

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 7543.5 7620.5 7788.5 7865.5
14 7547 7617 7792 7862
28 7554 7610 7799 7855
56 7568 7596 7813 7841
MN.00273.E - 006 193

15.2.2 Transmitter characteristics
- Maximum transmit power see Tab.52
Tab.43 - Maximum transmit power
Nominal Output Power Guaranteed Output Nominal Power

MODULATION
[dBm] Power [dBm] Tolerance
4QAMs 28 26
4QAM 28 26
16QAMs 25 23
16QAM 25 23
32QAM 24 22
±2 dB
64QAM 24 22
128QAM 24 22
256QAM 24 22
512QAM 24 22
1024QAM 23 21
- Transmit power with ACM Mean Constant Mode: All the selected ACM
profiles transmit the same output power level,
that is equal to the Maximum transmit power
indicated in the table above for the highest
modulation level selected.
Hybrid Mode: the ACM profiles above the
reference modulation transmit in Peak Constant
Mode (i.e. each modulation transmits the output
power indicated in the table above). Below the
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode is
followed.
- Tx bandwidth see Tab.47
- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps
- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 20 dB
- Attenuation Step 1 dB step
- RTPC attenuation range 20 dB

- Accuracy of built-in transmit power attenuation ±2 dB
- Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) range 20 dB
- ATPC Attenuation Step 1 dB
- Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390
- RF frequency stability ±5 ppm

±10 ppm (including ageing)
- Muting attenuation 60 dB
194 MN.00273.E - 006

15.2.3 Receiver characteristics
- Receiver bandwidth See Tab.41
- Noise Figure 6 dB
- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities 7

[dBm] see Tab.53
Tab.44 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 4QAMs 4QAM 16QAMs 16QAM 32QAM
BER=10-6 -93.5 -91.0 -87.5 -84.5 -82.5

7
BER=10-10 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5
BER=10-6 -92.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5

14
BER=10-10 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -78.0

28
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -74.5

56
BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5
CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz] 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM
BER=10-6 -80.0 -76.5 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5

7
BER=10-10 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5
BER=10-6 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

14
BER=10-10 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
BER=10-6 -75.0 -72.0 -68.5 -66.0 -62.0

28
BER=10-10 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -58.5

56
BER=10-10 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5
- Rx Spurious emissions according to ETSI EN 301 390
- AGC dynamic range from -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6
- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25 C° (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷ Thresholds @

BER=10-6
- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the

whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @
BER=10-6
±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm
- Maximum input level for BER 10-6 -22 dBm
- Residual BER (RBER) 10-12
7 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2 dB lower
MN.00273.E - 006 195

16 ALFOPLUS 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS
16.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F.387-10 and CEPT T/R 12-06 for RF channel arrangement
• FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
class 2.3)
16.2 GENERAL

CEPT T/R 12-06

10700 - 11700 530
ITU-R F.387-10
CEPT T/R 12-06

10700 - 11700 490 ITU-R F.387-10
FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
10700 - 11700 500 FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101

196 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.46 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Channel bandwidth (MHz)

Modulation
Type 7 10 14 28 30 40 56
4QAMs 9.295 11.408 16.393 32.956 35.117 46.462 65.912
4QAM 10.872 15.328 22.025 44.279 47.183 62.426 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 22.875 32.870 66.081 70.414 93.163 132.161
16QAM 21.080 29.720 42.705 85.854 91.484 121.040 171.708
32QAM 24.483 34.517 49.599 99.713 106.251 140.578 199.425
64QAM 30.293 42.707 61.368 123.373 131.463 173.936 246.746
128QAM 36.102 50.898 73.137 147.034 156.675 207.294 294.068
256QAM 41.912 59.088 84.906 170.694 181.887 240.651 341.389
512QAM 47.763 67.279 96.759 194.524 207.100 274.009 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 75.469 108.529 218.185 232.312 307.336 436.369
Tab.47 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz

CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - f0=11200 MHz

[MHz]
1 10715 - 10895 11205 - 11385
2 10875 - 11055 11365 - 11545 180
3 11035 - 11215 11525 - 11705

CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F387-10 - f0=11200 MHz

[MHz]
1 10695 - 10875 11225 - 11405
2 10855 - 11035 11385 - 11565 180
3 11015 - 11195 11545 - 11725


[MHz]
1 10700 - 10730 11200 - 11230

30
3 11170 - 11200 11670 - 11700
MN.00273.E - 006 197

Tab.48 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10- GO-RETURN: 490 MHz
- 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 10718.5 10891.5 11208.5 11381.5
14 10722 10888 11212 11378
28 10729 10881 11219 11371
40 10735 10875 11225 11365
56 10743 10867 11233 11357
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 10878.5 11051.5 11368.5 11541.5
14 10882 11048 11372 11538
28 10889 11041 11379 11531
40 10895 11035 11385 11525
56 10903 11027 11393 11517
SUB BAND 3

bandwidth
7 11038.5 11211.5 11528.5 11701.5
14 11042 11208 11532 11698
28 11049 11201 11539 11691
40 11055 11195 11545 11685
56 11063 11187 11553 11677
198 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.49 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-06 and ITU-R F.387-10 - GO-RETURN: 530 MHz
- 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 10698.5 10871.5 11228.5 11401.5
14 10702 10868 11232 11398
28 10709 10861 11239 11391
40 10715 10855 11245 11385
56 10723 10847 11253 11377
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 10858.5 11031.5 11388.5 11561.5
14 10862 11028 11392 11558
28 10869 11021 11399 11551
40 10875 11015 11405 11545
56 10883 11007 11413 11537
SUB BAND 3

bandwidth
7 11018.5 11191.5 11548.5 11721.5
14 11022 11188 11552 11718
28 11029 11181 11559 11711
40 11035 11175 11565 11705
56 11043 11167 11573 11697
Tab.50 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 490 MHz - Fre-
quency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Go-Return: 490 MHz - 180 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
10 10720 10890 11210 11380
30 10730 10880 11220 11370
MN.00273.E - 006 199

40 10735 10875 11225 11365
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 11880 11050 11370 11540
30 11890 11040 11380 11530
40 11895 11035 11385 11525
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 11040 11210 11530 11700
30 11050 11200 11540 11690
40 11055 11195 11545 11685
FREQUENCY RANGE: 10700 ÷ 11700 MHz - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
Go-Return: 500 MHz - 30 MHz RF filter tuning range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
10 10705 10725 11205 11225
30 10715 10715 11215 11215
40 - - - -
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 11175 11195 11675 11695
30 11185 11185 11685 11685
40 - - - -
200 MN.00273.E - 006


MODULATION
[dBm] Power [dBm] Tolerance
4QAMs 27 25
4QAM 27 25
16QAMs 24 22
16QAM 24 22
32QAM 23 21
±2 dB
64QAM 23 21
128QAM 23 21
256QAM 23 21
512QAM 23 21
1024QAM 22 20
followed.

steps


MN.00273.E - 006 201

- Receiver bandwidth See Table 2
- Noise Figure 6.5 dB

[dBm] see Tab.53
Tab.53
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5

10
BER=10-10 -90.0 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

30
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5

40
BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

7
BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
BER=10-6 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.0

10
BER=10-10 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.0
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

14
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

28
BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

30
BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -59.5

40
BER=10-10 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

56
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
202 MN.00273.E - 006


BER=10-6

BER=10-6
MN.00273.E - 006 203

17.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F497 and CEPT Recommendation ERC/REC 12-02 for RF channel arrangement
• EN 300 132-2 Characteristics of power supply
• EN 300 019 Climatic Characteristics (Operation: class 4.1 for ODU; storage: class 1.2; transport:
class 2.3).
17.2 GENERAL
Reference
Frequency Range [GHz] Duplex Spacing [MHz]
Recommendation
12.75 ÷ 13.25 266 ITU-R F497 CEPT T/R 12-02

- RF filter range Wide Filter Option (see Tab.56)
204 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.55 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Channel bandwidth [MHz]

Modulation type
7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369
Tab.56 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz
FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHzITU-R F.497 - CEPT ERC/REC 12-02 E -
f0=12996 MHz

[MHz]
1 12751 ÷ 12835 13017 ÷ 13101
2 12835 ÷ 12919 13101 ÷ 13185

84
3 12891 ÷ 12975 13157 ÷ 13241
4 12779 ÷ 12863 13045 ÷ 13129
MN.00273.E - 006 205

Tab.57 - 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz - GO-RETURN: 266 MHz -84 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel band-
width [MHz] Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency Lowest Frequency Highest Frequency
7 12754.5 12831.5 13020.5 13097.5
14 12758 12828 13024 13094
28 12765 12821 13031 13087
56 12779 12807 13045 13073
SUB BAND 2

Channel band-
7 12838.5 12915.5 13104.5 13181.5
14 12842 12912 13108 13178
28 12849 12905 13115 13171
56 12863 12891 13129 13157
SUB BAND 3

Channel band-
7 12894.5 12971.5 13160.5 13237.5
14 12898 12968 13164 13234
28 12905 12961 13171 13227
56 12919 12947 13185 13213
SUB BAND 4

Channel band-
7 12782.5 12866.5 13048.5 13132.5
14 12786 12870 13052 13136
28 12793 12877 13059 13143
56 12807 12891 13073 13157
206 MN.00273.E - 006

Nominal Output Power Guaranteed Output

MODULATION Nominal Power Tolerance
[dBm] Power [dBm]
4QAMs 27 25
4QAM 27 25
16QAMs 24 22
16QAM 24 22
32QAM 23 21
±2 dB
64QAM 23 21
128QAM 23 21
256QAM 23 21
512QAM 23 21
1024QAM 22 20
followed.

steps


MN.00273.E - 006 207

- Receiver bandwidth See Tab.56

[dBm] see Tab.59
Tab.59 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm]
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
64QAM 128QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 512QAM 1024QAM
BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

7
BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

14
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

28
BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

56
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

BER=10-6

BER=10-6
- ±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

208 MN.00273.E - 006

18.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F.636 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-07 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3)
18.2 GENERAL

14501 - 15348 420 ITU-R F.636
14403 - 15348 490 ITU-R F.636
14501 - 15348 728 CEPT T/R 12-07
14613 - 15251 322 N.A.
14620 - 15244 315 N.A:
MN.00273.E - 006 209

- Transceiver tuning range: see Tab.61
Frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.62, Tab.63, Tab.64, Tab.65, Tab.66 and Tab.67.
Tab.61 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment
Channel bandwidth (MHz)

Modulation
Type 7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369
210 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.62 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz
FREQUENCY RANGE:14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 420 MHz - ITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz

[MHz]
1 14500 - 14620 14920 - 15040
2 14612 - 14732 15032 - 15152

120
3 14724 - 14844 15144 - 15264
4 14808 - 14928 15228 - 15348
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14403 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 490 MHz - ITU-R F636 - f0=11701MHz

[MHz]
1 14402 - 14522 14892 - 15012
2 14514 - 14634 15004 - 15124

120
3 14626 - 14746 15116 - 15236
4 14738 - 14858 15228 - 15348
FREQUENCY RANGE: 14501 ÷ 15348 MHz - GO-RETURN: 728 MHz - CEPT T/R 12-07 - f0=14924MHz

[MHz]
1 14500 - 14620 15228 - 15348 120

[MHz]
1 14613 - 14705 14935 - 15027
2 14669 - 14761 14991 - 15083
3 14725 - 14817 15047 - 15139 92
4 14781 - 14873 15103 - 15195
5 14837 - 14929 15159 - 15251

[MHz]
1 14620 - 14705 14935 - 15020
2 14676 - 14761 14991 - 15076
3 14732 - 14817 15047 - 15132 85
4 14788 - 14873 15103 - 15188
5 14844 - 14929 15159 - 15244
MN.00273.E - 006 211

Tab.63 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
7 14503.5 14616.5 14923.5 15036.5
14 14507 14613 14927 15033
28 14514 14606 14934 15026
56 14528 14592 14948 15012
SUB BAND 2

Channel
[MHz]
7 14615.5 14728.5 15035.5 15148.5
14 14619 14725 15039 15145
28 14626 14718 15046 15138
56 14640 14704 15060 15124
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 14727.5 14840.5 15147.5 15260.5
14 14731 14837 15151 15257
28 14738 14830 15158 15250
56 14752 14816 15172 15236
SUB BAND 4

bandwidth
7 14811.5 14931.5 15231.5 15351.5
14 14815 14935 15235 15355
28 14822 14942 15242 15362
56 14836 14956 15256 15376
212 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.64 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
7 14405.5 14518.5 14895.5 15008.5
14 14409 14515 14899 15005
28 14416 14508 14906 14998
56 14430 14494 14920 14984
SUB BAND 2

Channel
[MHz]
7 14517.5 14630.5 15007.5 15120.5
14 14521 14627 15011 15117
28 14528 14620 15018 15110
56 14542 14606 15032 15096
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 14629.5 14742.5 15119.5 15232.5
14 14633 14739 15123 15229
28 14640 14732 15130 15222
56 14654 14718 15144 15208
SUB BAND 4

bandwidth
7 14741.5 14861.5 15231.5 15351.5
14 14745 14865 15235 15355
28 14752 14872 15242 15362
56 14766 14886 15256 15376
MN.00273.E - 006 213

SUB BAND 1

Channel
[MHz]
7 14503.5 14616.5 15231.5 15344.5
14 14507 14613 15235 15341
28 14514 14606 15242 15334
56 14528 14592 15256 15320
214 MN.00273.E - 006

SUB BAND 1

7 14616.5 14701.5 14938.5 15023.5
14 14620 14698 14942 15020
28 14627 14691 14949 15013
56 14641 14677 14963 14999
SUB BAND 2

7 14672.5 14757.5 14994.5 15079.5

14 14676 14754 14998 15076
28 14683 14747 15005 15069
56 14697 14733 15019 15055
SUB BAND 3

7 14728.5 14813.5 15050.5 15135.5
14 14732 14810 15054 15132

28 14739 14803 15061 15125
56 14753 14789 15075 15111
SUB BAND 4

7 14784.5 14869.5 15106.5 15191.5
14 14788 14866 15110 15188
28 14795 14859 15117 15181

56 14809 14845 15131 15167
SUB BAND 5

7 14840.5 14925.5 15162.5 15247.5
14 14844 14922 15166 15244
28 14851 14915 15173 15237
56 14865 14901 15187 15223
MN.00273.E - 006 215

SUB BAND 1

7 14623.5 14701.5 14938.5 15016.5
14 14627 14698 14942 15013
28 14634 14691 14949 15006
56 14648 14677 14963 14992
SUB BAND 2

7 14679.5 14757.5 14994.5 15072.5

14 14683 14754 14998 15069
28 14690 14747 15005 15062
56 14704 14733 15019 15048
SUB BAND 3

7 14735.5 14813.5 15050.5 15128.5
14 14739 14810 15054 15125

28 14746 14803 15061 15118
56 14760 14789 15075 15104
SUB BAND 4

7 14791.5 14869.5 15106.5 15184.5
14 14795 14866 15110 15181
28 14802 14859 15117 15174

56 14816 14845 15131 15160
SUB BAND 5

7 14847.5 14925.5 15162.5 15240.5
14 14851 14922 15166 15237
28 14858 14915 15173 15230
56 14872 14901 15187 15216
216 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.68 -Maximum transmit power
Nominal Output Power Guaranteed Output Power Nominal Power

MODULATION
[dBm] [dBm] Tolerance
4QAMs 27 25
4QAM 27 25
16QAMs 24 22
16QAM 24 22
32QAM 23 21
±2 dB
64QAM 23 21
128QAM 23 21
256QAM 23 21
512QAM 23 21
1024QAM 22 20
reference modulation the Mean Constant Mode
is followed.
- Frequency agility Following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at 250 kHz

steps



- Muting attenuation 60 db
MN.00273.E - 006 217

- Receiver bandwidth see Tab.61
- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] 10

see Tab.69
BER=10-6 -93.0 -90.5 -87.0 -84.0 -82.0

7
BER=10-10 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0
BER=10-6 -92.0 -88.5 -85.5 -82.0 -80.0

14
BER=10-10 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -89.0 -85.5 -82.0 -79.0 -77.5

28
BER=10-10 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.5
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

56
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
BER=10-6 -79.5 -76.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0

7
BER=10-10 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.0 -68.0 -64.0

14
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0
BER=10-6 -74.5 -71.5 -68.0 -65.5 -61.5

28
BER=10-10 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

56
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
- Rx Spurious emissions According to ETSI EN 301 390
- AGC dynamic range From -22 dBm to Threshold @ BER=10-6

- Accuracy of Rx level indication @ 25° C (PC reading)±2dB in the range -22dBm ÷Thresholds @
BER=10-6
- Accuracy of Rx level indication over the whole

temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷Thresholds @
BER=10-6
10 Typical receiver sensitivities is 2dB lower
218 MN.00273.E - 006

19.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• CEPT ERC REC 70-03
• EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio
class 2.3)
19.2 GENERAL
DUPLEX SPACING REFERENCE

FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]
[MHz] RECOMMENDATION
17100 ÷ 17300 - N.A.

MN.00273.E - 006 219

CHANNEL BANDWIDTH [MHz]

MODULATION TYPE
7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

a
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 ÷ 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 ÷ 193 MHz
Sub Band Lower Half Limits [MHz] Upper Half Limits [MHz] RF Filter Range [MHz]
1 17100 ÷ 17156 17244 ÷ 17300 56
a. Go-return software selectable with 250 kHz step from 95 to 193 MHz
Tab.73 - 17100 MHz ÷ 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17100 ÷ 17300 MHz - GO-RETURN: 95 ÷ 193 MHz -

56 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range a.
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
7 17103.5 17152.5 17247.5 17296.5
14 17107 17149 17251 17293
28 17114 17142 17258 17286
56 17128 17128 17272 17272
220 MN.00273.E - 006

- Maximum transmit power11 see Tab.83
Nominal Output Power Guaranteed Output Power

MODULATION
[dBm] [dBm]
4QAMs 22 20
4QAM 22 20
16QAMs 20 18
16QAM 20 18
32QAM 18 16
64QAM 18 16
128QAM 18 16
256QAM 18 16
512QAM 18 16
1024QAM 17 15
- Minimum Tx power see Tab.75
Tab.75 - Minimum Tx power
Minimum Tx power (dBm)

Minimum Tx power (dBm)
MODULATION ALFOplus 17
ALFOplus 17
Extended dynamic
4QAMs 2 -18
4QAM 2 -18
16QAMs 0 -20
16QAM 0 -20
32QAM -2 -22
64QAM -2 -22
128QAM -2 -22
256QAM -2 -22
512QAM -2 -22
1024QAM -3 -23
11 It can comply with CEPT/ERC/REC/70-03 (EIRP 100mW) by enabling Tx power.
MN.00273.E - 006 221

followed.

steps
- Built-in transmit power attenuation range 40 dB 12
- Attenuation step 1 dB step
- ATPC attenuation step 1 dB


12 The actual power attenuation range depends on the firmware version installed in the equipment.
222 MN.00273.E - 006

- Noise Figure 8 dB
- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities13 [dBm] see Tab.84
BER=10-6 -91.5 -89.0 -85.5 -82.5 -80.5

7
BER=10-10 -89.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5
BER=10-6 -90.5 -87.0 -83.5 -80.5 -78.5

14
BER=10-10 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -76.5
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -76.0

28
BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -74.0
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -72.5

56
BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -70.5
BER=10-6 -78.0 -74.5 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5

7
BER=10-10 -76.0 -72.5 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5
BER=10-6 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5

14
BER=10-10 -74.0 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -60.5
BER=10-6 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5 -64.0 -60.0

28
BER=10-10 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -58.0
BER=10-6 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -56.5

56
BER=10-10 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -54.5

BER=10-6

temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @
BER=10-6

13 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.
MN.00273.E - 006 223

20.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F.595 and CEPT Rec. T/R 12-03 for RF channel arrangement
• EN 302 217 for point to point fixed radio
class 2.3)
20.2 GENERAL
DUPLEX SPACING REFERENCE

FREQUENCY RANGE [MHz]
[MHz] RECOMMENDATION
17700 ÷ 19700 1010 ITU-R F.595 - CEPT T/R 12-03
17700 ÷ 19700 1560 ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7
17700 ÷ 19700 1560 FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101


224 MN.00273.E - 006


MODULATION TYPE
7 10 14 20 28 30 40 50 56
4QAMs 9.295 11.408 16.393 23.231 32.956 32.117 46.462 58.078 65.912
4QAM 10.872 15.328 22.025 31.213 44.279 47.183 62.426 78.033 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 22.875 32.870 46.581 66.081 70.414 93.163 116.454 132.161
16QAM 21.080 29.720 42.705 60.520 85.854 91.484 121.040 151.300 171.708
32QAM 24.483 34.517 49.599 70.289 99.713 106.251 140.578 175.723 199.425
64QAM 30.293 42.707 61.368 86.968 123.373 131.373 173.936 217.420 246.746
128QAM 36.102 50.898 73.137 103.647 147.034 156.675 207.294 259.117 294.068
256QAM 41.912 59.088 84.906 120.326 170.694 181.887 240.651 300.814 341.389
512QAM 47.763 67.279 96.759 137.004 194.524 207.100 274.009 342.511 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 75.469 108.529 153.683 218.185 232.312 307.336 384.208 436.369

ITU-R F.595 - CEPT REC T/R 12-03 - f0=18700 MHz
1 17699 ÷ 18058 18709 ÷ 19068 359
2 18016 ÷ 18375 19026 ÷ 19385 359
3 18332 ÷ 18691 19342 ÷ 19701 359
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 ÷ 19700 MHz -
GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7
1 17700 ÷ 18140 19260 ÷ 19700 440
MN.00273.E - 006 225

Tab.80 - 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 19700 MHz - ITU-R F.595 - Annex7- GO-RETURN: 1010 MHz - 359 MHz
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a
7 17702.5 18054.5 18712.5 19064.5
14 17706 18051 18716 19061
28 17712.75 18044.25 18722.75 19054.25
56 17726.5 18030.5 18736.5 19040.5
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz] a.
7 18019.5 18371.5 19029.5 19381.5
14 18023 18368 19033 19378
28 18029.75 18361.25 19039.75 19371.25
56 18043.5 18347.5 19053.5 19357.5
SUB BAND 3

bandwidth
[MHz] a. Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz] Carrier [MHz]
7 18335.5 18687.5 19345.5 19697.5
14 18339 18684 19349 19694
28 18345.75 18677.25 19355.75 19687.25
56 18359.5 18663.5 19369.5 19673.5
a. The actual channel bandwidth is compliant with a channel spacing of 7, 13.75, 27.5 and 55 MHz re-
spectively
226 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.81 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560
MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 ÷ 19700 MHz -
ITU-R F.595 - Annex 7 - GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
7 17703.5 18136.5 19263.5 19696.5
14 17707 18133 19267 19693
28 17713.75 18126.25 19273.75 19686.25
56 17727.5 18112.5 19287.5 19672.5
Tab.82 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - FCC
CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 17700 ÷ 19700 MHz FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
GO-RETURN: 1560 MHz - 440 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
10 17705 18135 19265 19695
20 17710 18130 19270 19690
30 17715 18125 19275 19685
40 17720 18120 19280 19680
50 17725 18115 19295 19675
MN.00273.E - 006 227


MODULATION
4QAMs 23 21
4QAM 23 21
16QAMs 21 19
16QAM 21 19
32QAM 19 17
±2 dB
64QAM 19 17
128QAM 19 17
256QAM 19 17
512QAM 19 17
1024QAM 18 16
followed.

steps



- Muting attenuation: 60 dB
228 MN.00273.E - 006

- Noise Figure 7 dB
BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5

7
BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5

14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0

20
BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

28
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5

30
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0

40
BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

56
BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5
BER=10-6 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

7
BER=10-10 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

10
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

14
BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

20
BER=10-10 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

28
BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
BER=10-6 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5

30
BER=10-10 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
14 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower.
MN.00273.E - 006 229

BER=10-6 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0
40
BER=10-10 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

50
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
BER=10-6 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

56
BER=10-10 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

BER=10-6

BER=10-6
230 MN.00273.E - 006

21.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F.637-3 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 13-02 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3).
21.2 GENERAL
FREQUENCY RANGE DUPLEX SPACING REFERENCE

[MHz] [MHz] RECOMMENDATION
ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3

22000 ÷ 23600 1008
CEPT T/R 13-02
21200 ÷ 23600 1232 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1
21200 ÷ 23600 1200 ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4
21200 ÷ 23600 1200 FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101
- Modulation scheme: 4QAMs/4QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

- Capacity: see Tab.86
MN.00273.E - 006 231

- RF filter range: Wide Filter Option see Tab.87
- Transceiver tuning range: See Tab.87
The frequency carrier limits are given in Tab.88, Tab.89 and Tab.90.
Tab.86 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment

MODULATION TYPE
7 10 14 20 28 30 40 50 56
4QAMs 9.295 11.408 16.393 23.231 32.956 35.117 46.462 58.078 65.912
4QAM 10.872 15.328 22.025 31.213 44.279 47.183 62.426 78.033 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 22.875 32.870 46.581 66.081 70.414 93.163 116.454 132.161
16QAM 21.080 29.720 42.705 60.520 85.854 91.484 121.040 151.300 171.708
32QAM 24.483 34.517 49.599 70.289 99.713 106.251 140.578 175.723 199.425
64QAM 30.293 42.707 61.368 86.968 123.373 131.463 173.936 217.420 246.746
128QAM 36.102 50.898 73.137 103.647 147.034 156.675 207.294 259.117 294.068
256QAM 41.912 59.088 84.906 120.326 170.694 181.887 240.651 300.814 341.389
512QAM 47.763 67.279 96.759 137.004 194.524 207.100 274.009 342.511 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 75.469 108.529 153.683 218.185 232.312 307.336 384.208 436.369

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 - f0=21196 MHz
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
1 22002.75 ÷ 22338.75 23010.75 ÷ 23346.75

336
2 22254.75 ÷ 22590.75 23262.75 ÷ 23598.75

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - f0=21196 MHz
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
1 21217 ÷ 21623 22449 ÷ 22855 392
2 21616 ÷ 22008 22848 ÷ 23240 392
3 22008 ÷ 22344 23240 ÷ 23576 336

ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 4 - f0=21196 MHz
RF Filter Tuning
Range [MHz]
1 21200 ÷ 21605.5 22400 ÷ 22805.5 405.5
2 21600 ÷ 22000 22800 ÷ 23200 400
3 21997.5 ÷ 22400 23197.5 ÷ 23600 402.5
232 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.88 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 -
Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits
FREQUENCY RANGE: 22000 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1008 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 3 - 336 MHz
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
7 22006.25 22335.25 23014.25 23343.25
14 22009.75 22331.75 23017.75 23339.75
28 22016.75 22324.75 23024.75 23332.75
56 22030.75 22310.75 23038.75 23318.75
SUB BAND 2

bandwidth
7 22258.25 22587.25 23266.25 23595.25
14 22261.75 22583.75 23269.75 23591.75
28 22268.75 22576.75 23276.75 23584.75
56 22282.75 22562.75 23290.75 23570.75
MN.00273.E - 006 233

Tab.89 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Fre-
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1232 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - 392-
336 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
7 21227.5 21612.5 22459.5 22844.5
14 21231 21609 22463 22841
28 21238 21602 22470 22834
56 21252 21588 22484 22820
SUB BAND 2

bandwidth
7 21619.5 22004.5 22851.5 23236.5
14 21623 22001 22855 23233
28 21630 21994 22862 23226
56 21644 21980 22876 23212
SUB BAND 3

Channel
[MHz]
7 22011.5 22340.5 23243.5 23572.5
14 22015 22337 23247 23569
28 22022 22330 23254 23562
56 22036 22316 23268 23548
234 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.90 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Fre-
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - 400 -
403.5 - 405.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

bandwidth
7 21217 21602 22417 22802
14 21220.5 21598.5 22420.5 22798.5
28 21227.5 21591.5 22427.5 22791.5
56 21241.5 21577.5 22441.5 22777.5
SUB BAND 2

bandwidth
7 21609 21994 22809 23194
14 21612.5 21990.5 22812.5 23190.5
28 21619.5 21983.5 22819.5 23183.5
56 21633.5 21969.5 22833.5 23169.5
SUB BAND 3

Channel band-
7 22001 22386 23201 23586
14 22004.5 22382.5 23204.5 23582.5
28 22011.5 22375.5 23211.5 23575.5
56 22025.5 22361.5 23225.5 23561.5
Tab.91 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz - Fre-
FREQUENCY RANGE: 21200 ÷ 23600 MHz - GO-RETURN: 1200 MHz -

FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - 405.5-400-403.5 MHz RF Filter Tuning Range
SUB BAND 1

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 21205 21600.5 22405 22800.5
20 21210 21595.5 22410 22795.5
30 21215 21590.5 22415 22790.5
40 21220 21585.5 22420 22785.5
MN.00273.E - 006 235

50 21225 21580.5 22425 21780.5
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
[MHz]
10 21605 21995 22805 23195
20 21610 21990 22810 23190
30 21615 21985 22815 23185
40 21620 21980 22820 23180
50 21625 21975 22825 23175
SUB BAND 3

Channel band-
10 22002.5 22395 23202.5 23586
20 22007.5 22390 23207.5 23590
30 22012.5 22385 23212.5 23585
40 22017.5 22380 23217.5 23580
50 22022.5 22375 23222.5 23575
236 MN.00273.E - 006


MODULATION
4QAMs 23 21
4QAM 23 21
16QAMs 21 19
16QAM 21 19
32QAM 19 17
±2 dB
64QAM 19 17
128QAM 19 17
256QAM 19 17
512QAM 19 17
1024QAM 18 16
followed.
- Frequency agility following ITU-R/CEPT channel plans or at

250 kHz steps


MN.00273.E - 006 237

- Noise figure 7 dB
BER=10-6 -92.5 -90.0 -86.5 -83.5 -81.5

7
BER=10-10 -90.5 -88.0 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

10
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -91.5 -88.0 -85.0 -81.5 -79.5

14
BER=10-10 -89.5 -86.0 -83.0 -79.5 -77.5
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0

20
BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0
BER=10-6 -88.5 -85.0 -81.5 -78.5 -77.0

28
BER=10-10 -86.5 -83.0 -79.5 -76.5 -75.0
BER=10-6 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.5

30
BER=10-10 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.5
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.0 -75.0

40
BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.0
BER=10-6 -86.0 -82.5 -79.0 -76.0 -74.0

50
BER=10-10 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0
BER=10-6 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5

56
BER=10-10 -83.5 -80.0 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5
BER=10-6 -79.0 -75.5 -73.0 -70.0 -66.5

7
BER=10-10 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -64.5

10
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -62.5
BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -63.5

14
BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5
BER=10-6 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

20
BER=10-10 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -74.0 -71.0 -67.5 -65.0 -61.0

28
BER=10-10 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0
15 Typical receiver sensitivities are 2dB lower
238 MN.00273.E - 006

BER=10-6 -73.5 -70.5 -67.0 -64.5 -60.5
30
BER=10-10 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.5
BER=10-6 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.0

40
BER=10-10 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.0
BER=10-6 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0 -62.5 -58.0

50
BER=10-10 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0
BER=10-6 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5 -62.0 -57.5

56
BER=10-10 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

BER=10-6

- whole temperature range (PC reading) ±3dB in the range -50dBm ÷ Thresholds @
BER=10-6
- ±4dB in the range -49dBm ÷ -22dBm

MN.00273.E - 006 239

22.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F748-3 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 13-02 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3).
22.2 GENERAL

24.5 ÷ 26.5 1008 ITU-R F748-3 - CEPT T/R 13-02
- Modulation scheme 4QAMs/QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

240 MN.00273.E - 006


MODULATION TYPE
7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

ITU-R F.748-3 Annex 1 and CEPT REC T/R 13-02 Annex A - f0=25501 MHz
Lower Half Limits Upper Half Limits RF Filter Tuning

Sub Band
[MHz] [MHz] Range [MHz]
1 24549 ÷ 24997 25557 ÷ 26005

448
2 24997 ÷ 25445 26005 ÷ 26453
Tab.97 - 24500 MHz ÷ 26500 MHz band - Go-Return 1008 MHz - frequency carrier limits
SUB BAND 1

Channel
(MHz)
Carrier (MHz) Carrier (MHz) Carrier (MHz) Carrier (MHz)
7 24552.5 24993.5 25560.5 26001.5
14 24556 24990 25564 25998
28 24563 24983 25571 25991
56 24577 24969 25585 25977
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
(MHz)
7 25000.5 25441.5 26008.5 26449.5
14 25004 25438 26012 26446
28 25011 25431 26019 26439
56 25025 25417 26033 26425
MN.00273.E - 006 241


MODULATION
(dBm) Power (dBm) Tolerance
4QAMs 22 20
4QAM 22 20
16QAMs 20 18
16QAM 20 18
32QAM 18 16
±2 dB
64QAM 18 16
128QAM 18 16
256QAM 18 16
512QAM 18 16
1024QAM 17 15
is followed.

steps


242 MN.00273.E - 006

- Guaranteed receiver sensitivities16 (dBm) see Tab.105
Tab.99 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm)
BER=10-6 -91.0 -88.5 -85.0 -82.0 -80.0

7
BER=10-10 -89.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0
BER=10-6 -90.0 -86.5 -83.0 -80.0 -78.0

14
BER=10-10 -88.0 -84.5 -81.0 -78.0 -76.0
BER=10-6 -87.0 -83.5 -80.0 -77.5 -75.5

28
BER=10-10 -85.0 -81.5 -78.0 -75.0 -73.5
BER=10-6 -84.0 -80.5 -77.0 -74.0 -72.0

56
BER=10-10 -82.0 -78.5 -75.0 -72.0 -70.0
BER=10-6 -77.5 -74.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.0

7
BER=10-10 -75.5 -72.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0
BER=10-6 -75.5 -72.0 -69.0 -66.0 -62.0

14
BER=10-10 -73.5 -70.0 -67.0 -64.0 -60.0
BER=10-6 -72.5 -69.5 -66.0 -63.5 -59.5

28
BER=10-10 -70.5 -67.5 -64.0 -61.5 -57.5
BER=10-6 -69.5 -66.5 -63.0 -60.5 -56.0

56
BER=10-10 -67.5 -64.5 -61.0 -58.5 -54.0

BER=10-6

BER=10-6

MN.00273.E - 006 243

23.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• ITU-R F749-2 and CEPT Recommendation T/R 12-01 for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3).
23.2 GENERAL

37000 ÷ 39500 1260 ITU-R F749-2 - CEPT T/R 12-01
- Modulation scheme 4QAMs/QAM/16QAMs/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/

244 MN.00273.E - 006


MODULATION TYPE
7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

ITU-R F.749-2 Annex 1 and CEPT REC T/R 12-01 Annex A - f0=38248 MHz

Sub Band
1 37058 ÷ 37618 38318 ÷ 38878

560
2 37618 ÷ 38178 38878 ÷ 39438
SUB BAND 1

Channel
(MHz)
7 37061.5 37614.5 38321.5 38874.5
14 37065 37611 38325 38871
28 37072 37604 38332 38864
56 37086 37590 38346 38850
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
(MHz)
7 37621.5 38174.5 38881.5 39434.5
14 37625 38171 38885 39431
28 37632 38164 38892 39424
56 37646 38150 38906 39410
MN.00273.E - 006 245


MODULATION
4QAMs 19 17
4QAM 19 17
16QAMs 17 15
16QAM 17 15
32QAM 15 13
±2 dB
64QAM 15 13
128QAM 15 13
256QAM 15 13
512QAM 15 13
1024QAM 14 12
is followed.

steps


246 MN.00273.E - 006

- Noise Figure 9 dB
BER=10-6 -90.5 -88 -84.5 -81.5 -79.5

7
BER=10-10 -88.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5
BER=10-6 -89.5 -86 -83 -79.5 -77.5

14
BER=10-10 -87.5 -84.0 -81.0 -77.5 -75.5
BER=10-6 -86.5 -83 -79.5 -76.5 -75

28
BER=10-10 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -73.0
BER=10-6 -83.5 -80 -76.5 -73.5 -71.5

56
BER=10-10 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5
BER=10-6 -77.0 -73.5 -71.0 -68.0 -64.5

7
BER=10-10 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5
BER=10-6 -75.0 -71.5 -68.5 -65.5 -61.5

14
BER=10-10 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5
BER=10-6 -72.0 -69.0 -65.5 -63.0 -59.0

28
BER=10-10 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -57.0
BER=10-6 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5 -60.0 -55.5

56
BER=10-10 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5

BER=10-6

BER=10-6

MN.00273.E - 006 247

24.1 FOREWORD
• EN 301 489-4 for EMC
• CEPT ECC Recommendation 01-04 (go-return 1500 MHz) for RF channel arrangement
class 2.3).
24.2 GENERAL

40500 ÷ 43500 1500 CEPT T/R 01-04

248 MN.00273.E - 006


MODULATION TYPE
7 14 28 56
4QAMs 9.295 16.393 32.956 65.912
4QAM 10.872 22.025 44.279 88.558
16QAMs 16.225 32.870 66.081 132.161
16QAM 21.080 42.705 85.854 171.708
32QAM 24.483 49.599 99.713 199.425
64QAM 30.293 61.368 123.373 246.746
128QAM 36.102 73.137 147.034 294.068
256QAM 41.912 84.906 170.694 341.389
512QAM 47.763 96.759 194.524 389.048
1024QAM 53.572 108.529 218.185 436.369

CEPT ECC REC 01-04 Annex A - f0=42000 MHz

Sub Band
1 40510 ÷ 41054 42010 ÷ 42554
2 40978 ÷ 41522 42478 ÷ 43022 544
3 41446 ÷ 41990 42946 ÷ 43490
SUB BAND 1

Channel
(MHz)
7 40513.5 41050.5 42013.5 42550.5
14 40517 41047 42017 42547
28 40524 41040 42024 42540
56 40538 41026 42038 42526
SUB BAND 2

Channel
bandwidth
(MHz)
7 40981.5 41518.5 42481.5 43018.5
14 40985 41515 42485 43015
28 40992 41508 42492 43008
MN.00273.E - 006 249

56 41006 41494 42506 42994
SUB BAND 3

Channel
bandwidth
(MHz)
7 41449.5 41986.5 42949.5 43486.5
14 41453 41983 42953 43483
28 41460 41976 42960 43476
56 41474 41962 42974 43462

MODULATION
4QAMs 17 15
4QAM 17 15
16QAMs 15 13
16QAM 15 13
32QAM 13 11
±2 dB
64QAM 13 11
128QAM 13 11
256QAM 13 11
512QAM 13 11
1024QAM 12 10
is followed.

steps
250 MN.00273.E - 006


- Noise Figure 11 dB
BER=10-6 -88.5 -86.0 -82.5 -79.5 -77.5

7
BER=10-10 -86.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5
BER=10-6 -87.5 -84.0 -80.5 -77.5 -75.5

14
BER=10-10 -85.5 -82.0 -78.5 -75.5 -73.5
BER=10-6 -84.5 -81.0 -77.5 -74.5 -73.0

28
BER=10-10 -82.5 -79.0 -75.5 -72.5 -71.0
BER=10-6 -81.5 -78.0 -74.5 -71.5 -69.5

56
BER=10-10 -79.5 -76.0 -72.5 -69.5 -67.5
BER=10-6 -75.0 -71.5 -69.0 -66.0 -62.5

7
BER=10-10 -73.0 -69.5 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5
BER=10-6 -73.0 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5 -59.5

14
BER=10-10 -71.0 -67.5 -64.5 -61.5 -57.5
BER=10-6 -70.0 -67.0 -63.5 -61.0 -57.0

28
BER=10-10 -68.0 -65.0 -61.5 -59.0 -55.0
BER=10-6 -67.0 -64.0 -60.5 -58.0 -53.5

56
BER=10-10 -65.0 -62.0 -58.5 -56.0 -51.5

BER=10-6
MN.00273.E - 006 251

BER=10-6
252 MN.00273.E - 006

Section 9.
LISTS AND SERVICES
25 LIST OF FIGURES
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 10
Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 10
Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 10
Fig.4 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 11
Fig.5 - ALFOplus front/side view ...................................................................................... 21
Fig.6 - ALFOplus block diagram ....................................................................................... 42
Fig.7 - C60507 (48Vin 2 ports PoE injector) ...................................................................... 51
Fig.8 - C60506 (48Vin 4 ports PoE injector) ...................................................................... 51
Fig.9 - PoE injector interface ........................................................................................... 52
Fig.10 - ALFOplus GE ..................................................................................................... 56
Fig.11 - ALFOplus GO..................................................................................................... 57
Fig.12 - Bidirectional LLF ................................................................................................ 59
Fig.13 - Synchronisation block diagram ............................................................................ 60
Fig.14 - ATPC diagram ................................................................................................... 63
Fig.15 - Available loops .................................................................................................. 64

Fig.16 - Logical processing functions for Ethernet payload................................................... 64
Fig.17 - Not registered traffic default colour ...................................................................... 66
Fig.18 - Red curve......................................................................................................... 68
Fig.19 -........................................................................................................................ 70
Fig.20 - Ethernet frame fragmentation disabled ................................................................. 71
Fig.21 - Ethernet frame fragmentation enabled ................................................................. 71
Fig.22 - Header compression .......................................................................................... 72
Fig.23 - Hierarchical structure of maintenance domains ...................................................... 74
Fig.24 - NodeB and BTS synch ........................................................................................ 78
Fig.25 - SETS circuit ...................................................................................................... 78
Fig.26 - Synchronisation menu........................................................................................ 79
MN.00273.E - 006 253

Fig.27 - Sources of synchronisation ................................................................................. 80
Fig.28 -........................................................................................................................ 81
Fig.29 .......................................................................................................................... 82
Fig.30 - Microwave capacity management......................................................................... 85
Fig.31 .......................................................................................................................... 85
Fig.32 - Provide synchronism .......................................................................................... 86
Fig.33 - LAN synchronisation method ............................................................................... 88
Fig.34 - Grounding connection ........................................................................................ 93
Fig.35 - ODU with standard coupling kit ........................................................................... 99
Fig.36 - 1+0 ODU installation........................................................................................ 100
Fig.37 - 1+0 antenna flange ......................................................................................... 101

Fig.38 - Components ................................................................................................... 105
Fig.39 - Recommended tools (not included) .................................................................... 105
Fig.40 ........................................................................................................................ 106

Fig.41 ........................................................................................................................ 106
Fig.42 ........................................................................................................................ 107
Fig.43 ........................................................................................................................ 107

Fig.44 ........................................................................................................................ 108
Fig.45 ........................................................................................................................ 109
Fig.46 - On pole .......................................................................................................... 109

Fig.47 - Wall mounted.................................................................................................. 109
Fig.48 - Standard RJ45 crimper used for RJ45 indoor connector......................................... 110
Fig.49 - Standard RJ45 crimper (without comb) used for RJ45 shielded indoor connector ...... 111
Fig.50 - Functional drawing........................................................................................... 112
Fig.51 - Dimensioned drawing - M12 connector ............................................................... 113
Fig.52 - Cable connection side M12 (screw connection)..................................................... 113

Fig.53 - Pin assignment M12 socket, 5-pos., A-coded, socket side view .............................. 113
Fig.54 - Straight Ethernet cable..................................................................................... 115
Fig.55 - RJ-45 Pinout ................................................................................................... 115

Fig.56 - Indoor RJ45 unshielded assembly ...................................................................... 116
Fig.57 - P20032 kit...................................................................................................... 116
Fig.58 - Boot connector................................................................................................ 116
Fig.59 - Assembled Amphenol ....................................................................................... 118
Fig.60 - Cable connector keys ....................................................................................... 118
Fig.61 - Connector housing ........................................................................................... 119

Fig.62 - Connector tight ............................................................................................... 119
Fig.63 - P20032 .......................................................................................................... 120
Fig.64 - Connector positions ......................................................................................... 121

Fig.65 - Locking key for Amph. connectors - J23599 ........................................................ 122
Fig.66 - Assembled connectors...................................................................................... 123
Fig.67 - IDU-ODU optical connection .............................................................................. 126

Fig.68 - F03594 cable for laboratory use only.................................................................. 128
Fig.69 - F03608 cable for pointing (remove it after commission pointing)............................ 129
254 MN.00273.E - 006

Fig.70 - ALFOplus connectors ........................................................................................ 130
Fig.71 - Jumper LC/SFP - LC/LC .................................................................................... 130
Fig.72 - Jumper LC/SFP - Open end ............................................................................... 130
Fig.73 - Jumper LC/SFP - LC/SFP................................................................................... 131
Fig.74 - Opt. jumper outdoor LC/LC ............................................................................... 131
Fig.75 - Amphenol LC connector .................................................................................... 131
Fig.76 - Amphenol SFP/LC connector locked.................................................................... 132
Fig.77 - Amphenol SFP/LC connector check..................................................................... 132
Fig.78 - SFP into ALFOplus............................................................................................ 132
Fig.79 - Locked connection ........................................................................................... 133
Fig.80 - Unplug SFP ..................................................................................................... 133

Fig.81 - Connection option............................................................................................ 137
Fig.82 - IP address setting............................................................................................ 138
Fig.83 - Login connection using SCT............................................................................... 138

Fig.84 - Rescue login using SCT .................................................................................... 139
Fig.85 - Web LCT console ............................................................................................. 139
Fig.86 - Rescue connection using WLC ........................................................................... 140

Fig.87 - Bandwidth&Modulation, Local Link ID ................................................................. 141
Fig.88 - Frequency and power setting ............................................................................ 142
Fig.89 - Port configuration ............................................................................................ 142

Fig.90 - Equipment properties ....................................................................................... 143
Fig.91 - Store routing table........................................................................................... 143
Fig.92 - Remote element list ......................................................................................... 144

Fig.93 - Main menu with Rx signal power level ................................................................ 146
Fig.94 - S/N measurement monitoring ........................................................................... 146
Fig.95 - Vertical and horizontal adjustment ..................................................................... 147

Fig.96 - Antenna aiming block....................................................................................... 148
Fig.97 - Remote accessing ............................................................................................ 149
Fig.98 - Software download procedure ........................................................................... 152

Fig.99 - Upgrade software ............................................................................................ 152
Fig.100 - Backup/Restore configuration .......................................................................... 154
Fig.101 - Traffic management of "ALFOplus" unit ............................................................. 162
Fig.102 ...................................................................................................................... 163
Fig.103 ...................................................................................................................... 163
Fig.104 ...................................................................................................................... 164

Fig.105 ...................................................................................................................... 164
Fig.106 ...................................................................................................................... 165
Fig.107 ...................................................................................................................... 165

Fig.108 - Label attached on ODU H ................................................................................ 179
Fig.109 - Label attached on ODU L ................................................................................ 179
MN.00273.E - 006 255

256 MN.00273.E - 006
26 LIST OF TABLES
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................. 9
Tab.2 - RF channel arrangement ......................................................................................22
Tab.3 - Tx power............................................................................................................24
Tab.4 - Receiver thresholds (interleave enabled) ................................................................25
Tab.5 - Noise figure ........................................................................................................37

Tab.6 - Spectral efficiency ...............................................................................................38
Tab.7 - Max RSL Thresold................................................................................................38
Tab.8 - ACM switching thresholds .....................................................................................39
Tab.9 - Guaranteed Ethernet Latency (ms) for ALFOplus .....................................................43

Tab.10 - Guaranteed Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) for ALFOplus without Ethernet compression and
fragmentation.................................................................................................................45
Tab.11 - Interface characteristics .....................................................................................49

Tab.12 - Power consumption (W) .....................................................................................49
Tab.13 - PoE injector supported .......................................................................................50
Tab.14 - Code Table .......................................................................................................51

Tab.15 - Electrical characteristics .....................................................................................52
Tab.16 - Connectors .......................................................................................................52
Tab.17 - Description of alarms .........................................................................................52

Tab.18 - Flange type ......................................................................................................53
Tab.19 - Maximum length................................................................................................53
Tab.20 - Dimensions.......................................................................................................54
Tab.21 - Logical functions................................................................................................65
Tab.22 - Mounting Instructions ........................................................................................94
Tab.23 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency .................................................98
Tab.24 - Accessories for installation ................................................................................ 102
Tab.25 - Recommended RJ45 crimping tool ..................................................................... 110
Tab.26 - Auxiliary power cable ....................................................................................... 112
Tab.27 - Pinout M12 connector....................................................................................... 113
Tab.28 - Part to be assembled ....................................................................................... 114
Tab.29 - Wiring 1000Base-T .......................................................................................... 115

Tab.30 - List of Amphenol optical cable ........................................................................... 124
Tab.31 - List of optical jumper outdoor LC/LC................................................................... 124
Tab.32 - LC optical transceiver (SFP) .............................................................................. 125
Tab.33 - Voltage measured in auxiliary port ..................................................................... 145
Tab.34 - Ethernet connection stability ............................................................................. 149
Tab.35 - Bootstrap status display ................................................................................... 156
Tab.36 - Alarms ........................................................................................................... 157
MN.00273.E - 006 257

Tab.37 - ODU part number ............................................................................................ 167
Tab.38 - ALFOplus versions .......................................................................................... 168
Tab.39 - Frequency band............................................................................................... 182
Tab.40 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 183
Tab.41 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 7GHz ................................................................... 183
Tab.42 - Frequency carrier limits .................................................................................... 186
Tab.43 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 194
Tab.44 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities ....................................................................... 195
Tab.46 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 197
Tab.47 - Filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 11GHz.................................................................. 197

Tab.48 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......... 198
Tab.49 - 10700 MHz - 11700 MHz band - Go-return 530 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ......... 199
quency carrier limits ...................................................................................................... 199
Tab.53 ........................................................................................................................ 202

Tab.55 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment . 205
Tab.56 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 13GHz .............................................................. 205
Tab.57 - 12.75 ÷ 13.25 GHz band - Go-Return 266 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................ 206
Tab.58 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................ 207
Tab.59 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm].............................................................. 208

Tab.61 - Net Radio throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 210
Tab.62 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 15 GHz ............................................................. 211
Tab.63 - 14501 - 14348 MHz band - Go-Return 420 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ............... 212
Tab.64 - 1403 - 15348 MHz band - Go-return 490 MHz - Frequency carrier limits.................. 213
Tab.68 -Maximum transmit power ................................................................................. 217
Tab.73 - 17100 MHz ÷ 17300 MHz band - Go-return 144 MHz - Frequency carrier limits ........ 220
Tab.74 - Maximum transmit power ................................................................................ 221
Tab.75 - Minimum Tx power .......................................................................................... 221
258 MN.00273.E - 006

Tab.80 - 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - Go-return 1010 - Frequency carrier limits ............. 226
Tab.81 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz - 19700 MHz band go-return 1560 MHz
- Frequency carrier limits ............................................................................................... 227
Tab.82 - 17700 MHz ÷ 18140 MHz paired with 19260 MHz 17700 MHz ÷ 19700 MHz band - FCC
CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1560 MHz - Frequency carrier limits................................. 227
Tab.86 - Net radio throughtput in Mbit/s versus channel bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment .. 232

Tab.88 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 3 and CEPT T/R 13-02 -
Go-return 1008 MHz - Frequency carrier limits .................................................................. 233
Tab.89 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 - Annex 1 - Go-return 1232 MHz - Fre-
Tab.90 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - ITU-R F.637-3 Annex 4 - Go-return 1200 MHz - Frequen-
cy carrier limits ............................................................................................................. 235
Tab.91 - 21200 MHz ÷ 23600 MHz band - FCC CFR Title 47 Part 101 - Go-Return 1200 MHz - Fre-

Tab.93 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities [dBm] ............................................................. 238
Tab.97 - 24500 MHz ÷ 26500 MHz band - Go-Return 1008 MHz - frequency carrier limits ...... 241

Tab.99 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm).............................................................. 243
Tab.100 - Frequency band ............................................................................................. 244
Tab.101 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment 245
Tab.102 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 38 GHz ........................................................... 245
Tab.103 - 37058 MHz ÷ 39438 MHz band - Go-Return 1260 MHz - frequency carrier limits .... 245
Tab.104 - Maximum transmit power ............................................................................... 246

Tab.105 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm) ............................................................ 247
Tab.106 - Frequency band ............................................................................................. 248
Tab.107 - Net Radio Throughput in Mbit/s versus Channel Bandwidth for ALFOplus equipment 249
Tab.108 - RF filter sub-bands for ALFOplus 42 GHz ........................................................... 249
Tab.109 - 40500 MHz ÷ 43500 MHz band - Go-Return 1500 MHz - frequency carrier limits .... 249
Tab.110 - Maximum transmit power ............................................................................... 250
Tab.111 - Guaranteed receiver sensitivities (dBm) ............................................................ 251
MN.00273.E - 006 259

260 MN.00273.E - 006
27 ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
MN.00273.E - 006 261

262 MN.00273.E - 006

ALFOplus User Manual - MN - 00273e - ED6 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALFOplus User Manual - MN - 00273e - ED6 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALFOplus User Manual - MN - 00273e - ED6 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALFOplus

Access Link Full Outdoor

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ............................................................................... 7

2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .......................................... 8

3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................12

4 LIST OF ACRONYMS .................................................................................................15

5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................17

6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................22

7 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................55

9 LINE-UP OF ALFOPlus ............................................................................................135

11 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................................159

12 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................161

13 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................167

15 ALFOplus 7 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS.......................................................................182

16 ALFOplus 11GHZ CHARACTERISTICS......................................................................196

17 ALFOPLUS 13 GHz CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................204

18 ALFOPLUS 15 GHz CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................209

19 ALFOPLUS 17 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................219

20 ALFOPLUS 18 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................224

21 ALFOPLUS 23 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................231

22 ALFOPLUS 26 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................240

23 ALFOPLUS 38 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................244

24 ALFOPLUS 42 GHZ CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................248

25 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................253

26 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................257

Digital Radio Relay System ALFOplus

The following standards have been applied:

EN 60950-1:2006 and EN 60950-22:2006

EN 301 489-4 v.1.4.1. (2009-5)

ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 v1.4.1 (2010-7)

The equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.Following the requirements

Cologno Monzese, 20/06/2012 On behalf of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

2.1.1 Artificial respiration

2.1.2 Treatment of burns

• Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections

• Apply dry gauze on the burns

Step Description Figure

Lift the patient’s head and let it recline backwards as far

3 While performing these operations take a good supply of oxy-

While performing these operations observe if the patient’s

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

Fig.4 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

• installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system

• a good knowledge of IP networks and routing policy.

3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

Section 1 – User Guide

Section 2 – Description and specifications

The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.

Section 6 – Programming and supervision

Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.

Section 9 – Indexes and services

4.1 LIST OF ACRONYMS

What follows is a list of acronyms used in this handbook: